Mercedes-Benz 2010 ML-Class Operator`s manual

164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
M-Class
Operator’s Manual
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 1
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM
is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP®
and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink®
is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS
and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
X
This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
A number of these symbols
X
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
This continuation symbol marks a
YY
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 2
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 1
Version: 2.11.8.1
Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease
read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease
follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease
pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
1645841383 É1645841383}ËÍ
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 2
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 3
Version: 2.11.8.1
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 20
Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 69
Operation ........................................... 209
Practical hints ................................... 267
Technical data ................................... 345
3
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
4
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 4
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
115V AC Socket ................................. 198
3-zone automatic climate control
see Climate control system
4-ETS
see ETS/4-ETS
4MATIC
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
A
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 62
Indicator lamp ................................ 298
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 273, 284
Accessory weight .............................. 239
Accidents ........................................... 107
Air bags ........................................... 37
Distance warning function ............. 151
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 200
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ........................................ 53
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 293
see Headlamps
Adaptive Damping System
see ADS
AdBlue® ...................................... 331, 361
Capacity, AdBlue® tank ................. 358
Refilling ......................................... 332
Additives
Engine oil ....................................... 359
Gasoline ......................................... 361
Address change ................................... 22
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 156
Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (Advanced
TPMS) ................................................. 223
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 281, 296
Air bags ................................................ 37
Emergency call upon deployment . . 200
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (Canada
only) ........................................ 46, 305
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 305
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 275
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ........................................... 42
Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Side impact ...................................... 40
Window curtain ................................ 41
Air conditioning refrigerant and
lubricant ............................................. 359
Air distribution .......................... 171, 180
Air filter .............................................. 292
AIRMATIC/Compass menu ............... 127
Air pressure
see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) ............................ 240
Air pump (electric) ............................ 328
Air recirculation mode .............. 172, 182
Air suspension program
Comfortable driving style ............... 156
Introduction ................................... 155
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 285
Sporty driving style ........................ 156
Suspension tuning ......................... 156
Vehicle level control ...................... 156
Air volume ................................. 171, 181
Alarm system
see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
kit) .............................................. 268, 327
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 159
Alternator
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 280, 290
Alternator (Technical data)
see Vehicle specification
AMG menu ......................................... 123
Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 363
Antilock Brake System
see ABS
Anti-theft systems ............................... 66
Anti-theft alarm system ................... 66
Immobilizer ...................................... 66
Aquaplaning
see Hydroplaning
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 5
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Index
Armrest, front
Storage compartment .................... 193
Ashtrays ............................................. 196
Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 240
Audio/DVD menu .............................. 126
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 90
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 135
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 93
Automatic interior lighting control .... 97
Automatic locking when driving ...... 135
Automatic shift program .................. 114
Automatic transmission ................... 109
Automatic shift program ................ 114
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) ............................................ 117
Gear range indicator ...................... 114
Gear ranges ................................... 113
Gear selector lever ........................ 109
Hill-start assist system .................. 152
Kickdown ....................................... 113
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 117
Manual shift program ..................... 115
One-touch gearshifting .................. 115
Program mode indicator ................ 114
Program mode selector switch
(automatic shift program) .............. 114
Program mode selector switch
(manual shift program) .................. 116
Shifting procedure ......................... 111
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 115
Towing a trailer .............................. 113
Transmission position indicator ..... 112
Transmission positions .................. 112
AUX socket ........................................ 193
Axle oils .............................................. 357
B
BabySmart™
Air bag deactivation system ............. 46
Self-test ........................................... 47
Backrest
see Seats
Backup lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 293
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 240
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking condition .......................... 73
Replacing ....................................... 309
Battery, Vehicle ................................. 334
Charging ........................................ 336
Jump starting ................................. 336
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 280, 290
Bead (tire) .......................................... 240
Beverage holders
see Cup holders
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine) ............................................... 331
BlueTEC
AdBlue® tank ................................. 331
AdBlue® tank capacity ................... 358
Brake fluid
Checking level ............................... 217
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 284
Brake lamps
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 283
Brakes ................................................ 245
High-performance brake system .... 246
Parking brake ........................ 107, 247
Warning lamp ................................. 299
Break-in period .................................. 210
Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 214
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23
California retail buyers and
lessees, important notice for ............. 21
Calls (phone) ...................................... 139
Can holders
see Cup holders
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................................. 356
Cargo compartment
Cargo net ....................................... 191
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
Cover blind .................................... 190
5
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
6
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 6
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Fuse box ........................................ 344
Hooks ............................................ 189
Tie-down rings ............................... 188
Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 190
Cargo net ........................................... 191
Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 188
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 265
Carriers .............................................. 187
Center console
Lower part ....................................... 32
Upper part ....................................... 31
Central locking
Automatic ................................ 74, 135
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75
SmartKey ......................................... 70
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 75
Certification label .............................. 346
Children in the vehicle
Air bags ........................................... 37
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
system ............................................. 46
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 60
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59
Indicator lamp, front passenger
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46
Indicator lamp, front passenger
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42
Infant and child restraint systems .... 56
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ........................................... 42
Override switch ................................ 60
Safety notes ..................................... 55
Tether anchorage points .................. 58
Top tether ........................................ 58
Child safety
see Children in the vehicle
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
see Children in the vehicle
Chrome-plated exhaust tip,
cleaning .............................................. 266
Cigarette lighter ................................ 196
Climate control system .................... 165
3-zone automatic climate control . . 173
Air conditioning ..................... 169, 178
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 359
Air distribution ....................... 171, 180
Air recirculation mode ........... 172, 182
Air volume ............................. 171, 181
Automatic mode .................... 170, 179
Climate control .............................. 167
Deactivating system .............. 169, 178
Front defroster ...................... 171, 181
Residual heat and
ventilation .............................. 172, 183
Temperature .......................... 170, 179
Clock ............................................ 28, 132
Cockpit ................................................. 27
Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 240
Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 356
Collapsible wheel chock ................... 270
COMAND system
see separate COMAND system
operating instructions
Combination switch ............................ 95
Comfort submenu
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 136
Fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors ................................... 137
Seat belt adjustment feature ......... 136
Compass
Calling up ....................................... 207
Control system .................................. 119
Multifunction display ..................... 121
Multifunction steering wheel ......... 119
Resetting to factory settings .......... 129
Control system menus ...................... 121
AIRMATIC/Compass ...................... 127
AMG ............................................... 123
Audio/DVD .................................... 126
Distronic ........................................ 128
Navigation ..................................... 127
Off-road Mode ............................... 125
Settings ......................................... 129
Standard display ............................ 122
Telephone ...................................... 139
Trip computer ................................ 138
Vehicle configuration ..................... 137
Vehicle status message memory ... 128
Control system submenus
Comfort ......................................... 135
Instrument cluster ......................... 130
Lighting .......................................... 133
Time/Date ..................................... 132
Vehicle ........................................... 135
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 7
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Coolant
Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 363
Capacities ...................................... 358
Checking level ............................... 216
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 288
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps .................................................... 96
Cruise control .................................... 141
Activating ....................................... 142
Canceling ....................................... 142
Changing the set speed ................. 143
Last stored speed .......................... 143
Lever .............................................. 142
Messages in the mutlifunction
display ........................................... 278
Resume function ............................ 143
Setting current speed .................... 142
Cup holders ........................................ 194
Curb weight ....................................... 240
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23
Customer Relations Department ....... 24
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data recording ..................................... 24
Date, Setting ...................................... 132
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 94
Switching on or off ......................... 133
Deep water
see Standing water
Defroster
Rear window .................................. 183
Windshield ............................. 171, 181
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps ................................ 134
Interior lighting .............................. 135
Department of Transportation
see DOT
Diesel engine
Preglow indicator lamp .................... 29
Diesel fuel
see Fuel
Difficulties
While driving .................................. 106
With starting .................................. 105
Digital clock
see Clock
Digital speedometer ......................... 123
Dimensions (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 231
Displays
Digital speedometer ...................... 123
Distronic ........................................ 146
Maintenance service indicator ....... 258
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 272
Multifunction display ..................... 121
Outside temperature ............. 123, 131
Symbol messages .......................... 283
Text messages ............................... 273
Trip computer ................................ 138
Vehicle status message memory ... 128
Vehicle system settings ................. 129
Distronic ............................................ 144
Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 263
Control system .............................. 128
Distance warning function ............. 151
Distance warning
lamp ...................................... 146, 302
Driving with .................................... 150
Menu ............................................. 147
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 278
Resume function ............................ 149
Sensor cover .................................. 263
Speed settings ............................... 148
Door control panel .............................. 33
Door handles ........................................ 33
Doors
Child safety locks ............................ 60
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 286
Opening from inside ......................... 74
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 203
Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 306
DOT (Department of
Transportation) .................................. 240
Downhill Speed Regulation
see DSR
Drinking and driving ......................... 244
7
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
8
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 8
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Driving
Abroad ........................................... 257
Hydroplaning ................................. 247
Instructions ........................... 103, 244
In winter ........................................ 243
Off-road ......................................... 248
Problems ....................................... 106
Safety systems ................................ 61
Systems ......................................... 141
Through standing water ................. 247
With Distronic ................................ 150
Driving and parking
Safety notes .................................. 103
Driving off .................................. 105, 247
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
ABS .................................................. 62
BAS .................................................. 63
EBP .................................................. 63
ESP® ................................................ 63
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 64
Driving systems
Air suspension program ................. 155
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 159
Cruise control ................................ 141
Distronic ........................................ 144
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 152
Hill-start assist system .................. 152
Off-road driving program ............... 155
Parktronic system .......................... 160
Rear view camera .......................... 163
Driving tips, automatic
transmission ...................................... 113
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 152
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 286
E
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 87, 136
EBP (Electronic Brake
Proportioning) ...................................... 63
Electrical system
Improper work on or
modifications ................................... 23
Power outlets ................................. 197
Electrical system (Technical data)
see Vehicle specification
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP®
Electronic Traction System
see ETS/4-ETS
Emergency, in case of
First aid kit ..................................... 268
Flat tire .......................................... 319
Hazard warning flasher .................... 96
Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 201
Towing the vehicle ......................... 338
Emergency calls
Tele Aid .......................................... 200
Emergency engine shutdown ........... 344
Emergency operations
Limp-home mode ........................... 117
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 203
Emergency Tensioning Device
see ETD
Emission control ............................... 258
Information label ............................ 347
System warranties ........................... 20
Engine
Break-in recommendations ............ 210
Cleaning ......................................... 262
Compartment ................................ 212
Malfunction indicator
lamp ........................................ 29, 303
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 288
Number .......................................... 347
Starting .......................................... 103
Turning off ..................................... 108
Engine (Technical data)
see Vehicle specification
Engine compartment
Radiator ......................................... 214
Engine coolant
see Coolant
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 215
Additives ........................................ 359
Checking level ............................... 214
Consumption ................................. 214
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 291
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 9
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Oil dipstick ..................................... 215
Recommended engine oils and oil
filter ............................................... 359
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) .............................................. 63
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 64
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 273, 284
Off-road ESP® .................................. 65
Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 301
ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Device) ................................................. 52
Safety guidelines ............................. 39
ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 64
Express operation
Power windows .............................. 100
Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 184
Exterior lamp switch ........................... 93
Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 89
Fold-in function ........................ 91, 137
Parking position ............................... 90
Power-folding ................................... 91
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26
F
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 50
First aid kit ......................................... 268
Flat tire ............................................... 319
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 324
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 320
Spare wheel ........................... 319, 356
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320
Floormats ........................................... 208
Fluids
AdBlue® ......................................... 358
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 357
Brake fluid ..................................... 358
Capacities ...................................... 356
Engine coolant ............................... 358
Engine oil ....................................... 357
Power steering fluid ....................... 357
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 358
Fog lamps ............................................. 95
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 293, 294
Fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors ................................ 91, 137
Four-wheel drive
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
Front air bags
see Air bags
Front axle oil ...................................... 357
Front lamps
see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag ............ 40
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 275
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 305
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 305
Front seat head restraints
see Head restraints
Fuel ..................................................... 210
Additives ........................................ 361
Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 358
Diesel fuel ............................. 358, 360
Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 244
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 138
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 212
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp ........................................ 29, 303
Premium unleaded gasoline ... 358, 360
Refueling ........................................ 210
Requirements ................................ 360
Fuel filler flap ..................................... 212
Opening manually .......................... 308
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities ...................................... 356
Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
engine) ............................................... 331
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 358
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 212
Refueling ........................................ 210
Fuses .................................................. 342
9
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 10
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
10
Index
G
Garage door opener .................... 32, 204
Gasoline
see Fuel
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 240
Gear range ......................................... 113
Indicator ........................................ 114
Limiting .......................................... 115
Shifting into optimal ...................... 115
Gear selector lever ............................ 109
Cleaning ......................................... 265
Gearshift pattern ........................... 109
Shifting procedure ......................... 111
Transmission position indicator ..... 112
Transmission positions .................. 112
Generator
see Alternator
Global locking/unlocking
see Key, SmartKey
Glove box ........................................... 193
Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR
Gross Trailer Weight
see GTW
Gross Vehicle Weight
see GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
see GVWR
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 240
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 240
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ................................................ 240
H
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 265
Hazard warning flasher ....................... 96
Headlamp cleaning system ................ 96
Headlamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 92
Adjusting aim ................................. 317
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 93
Bi-Xenon .................................. 92, 312
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Cleaning system .............................. 96
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 94
Delayed shut-off ............................ 134
Halogen ......................................... 312
High-beam flasher ............................ 96
High-beam headlamps ..................... 96
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 93
Replacing bulbs ............................. 311
Switch .............................................. 93
Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 265
Head restraints .................................... 81
Adjustment ................................ 81, 83
Folding back .................................... 84
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ......................................... 53
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints, resetting ....................... 309
Rear seat head restraints ................. 84
Heated steering wheel ........................ 88
Height adjustment
Seat belt outlet ................................ 51
Seats ............................................... 81
Vehicle level control ...................... 156
High-beam flasher ............................... 96
High-beam headlamps ................ 96, 312
Indicator lamp .................................. 29
High-performance brake system ..... 246
Hill-start assist system ..................... 152
Hood ................................................... 212
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 286
Hooks ................................................. 189
Horn ...................................................... 27
HVAC
see Climate control system
Hydroplaning ..................................... 247
I
Identification labels .......................... 346
Identification number, vehicle
(VIN) ................................................... 347
Ignition ................................... 79, 80, 104
Immobilizer .......................................... 66
Indicator lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems
see Children in the vehicle
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 11
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Index
Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 208
Inside door handle .............................. 74
Instrument cluster ............................ 117
Illumination .................................... 118
Lamps ............................................ 297
Multifunction display ..................... 121
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Instrument panel
see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls
see Cockpit
Interior lighting
Delayed shut-off ............................ 135
Emergency lighting .......................... 98
Front ................................................ 97
Front reading lamps ......................... 97
Rear ................................................. 98
Rear reading lamps .......................... 98
Interior rear view mirror ..................... 89
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 90
Interior storage spaces
see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping
Rain sensor ...................................... 99
J
Jack ..................................................... 270
Jump starting ..................................... 336
K
Key, Mechanical
Loss of ............................................. 73
Replacing ......................................... 74
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 306
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp .......................... 73
Checking batteries ........................... 73
Factory setting ........................... 71, 72
Global locking (KEYLESSGO) .................................................. 73
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71
Global unlocking (KEYLESSGO) ............................................ 72, 73
Global unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 71
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Loss of ............................................. 73
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 286, 287
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof ......................... 102
Opening and closing the windows . 102
Remote control ................................ 70
Replacing ......................................... 74
Replacing batteries ........................ 309
Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73
Selective setting ........................ 71, 73
Starter switch positions ................... 79
KEYLESS-GO
Starter switch positions ................... 80
Kickdown ........................................... 113
Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 117
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 240
L
Labels
Certification ................................... 346
Emission control information ......... 347
Tire and Loading Information
placard ........................................... 227
Tire inflation pressure .................... 220
Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 93
Front .............................................. 312
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 293
Rear ............................................... 312
Switching on/off .............................. 93
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS .......................................... 28, 298
Brakes ..................................... 28, 299
Center console ................................ 31
Distance warning
lamp .............................. 146, 151, 302
Engine malfunction .................. 29, 303
ESP® ........................................ 28, 301
Fog lamps ........................................ 95
Front passenger front air bag off
(Canada only) .......................... 46, 305
11
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 12
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
12
Index
Front passenger front air bag off
(USA only) ................................ 42, 305
Fuel tank reserve ..................... 29, 303
High-beam headlamps ............... 29, 96
Instrument cluster ................... 28, 297
Low-beam headlamps ................ 29, 93
Low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale .................. 28, 304
Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 300
SRS .................................... 29, 36, 301
Turn signals ..................................... 28
Language, selecting .......................... 131
LATCH-type child seat anchors
see Children in the vehicle
License plate lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 294
Replacing bulbs ............................. 313
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 264
Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Lighting ................................................ 92
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 94
Exterior ............................................ 93
Interior ............................................. 97
Limp-home mode .............................. 117
Load index (tires) ...................... 236, 240
Loading
see Vehicle loading
Locator lighting ................................. 133
Lock button
Outside door handle (KEYLESSGO) .................................................. 73
Locking the vehicle
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Manually ........................................ 307
SmartKey ......................................... 70
Loss of
Key .................................................. 73
Service and Warranty Information
booklet .......................................... 346
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 93
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 93
Indicator lamp .................................. 29
Switching on .................................... 93
Lubricants .......................................... 356
Lumbar support ................................... 84
M
Maintenance ........................................ 21
Maintenance System
Service indicator display ................ 259
Service indicator message ............. 258
Service term exceeded .................. 259
Manual headlamp mode (Lowbeam headlamps) ................................ 93
Manual shift program ....................... 115
Maximum engine speed
see Vehicle specification
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 241
Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 240
Maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure .............................. 241
Mechanical key .................................. 306
Media interface ................................. 193
Memory function ................................. 92
Menus
see Control system menus
Minispare wheel
see Spare wheel
Mirrors .................................................. 89
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 90
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position ............................................ 90
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 89
Interior rear view mirror ................... 89
Memory function .............................. 92
Power-folding exterior rear view
mirrors ............................................. 91
Vanity mirror .................................. 195
MOExtended system ......................... 330
MOExtended tires ..................... 330, 352
MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 360
Motor Octane Number
see MON
Multicontour seat ................................ 85
Multifunction display ........................ 121
Symbol messages .......................... 283
Text messages ............................... 273
Vehicle status messages ............... 272
Multifunction display messages
ABS ....................................... 273, 284
Active headlamps .......................... 293
Advanced TPMS ..................... 281, 296
Air bags ......................................... 275
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 13
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Index
Air filter .......................................... 292
Air suspension program ................. 285
Alternator .............................. 280, 290
Automatic
transmission .................................. 280
Battery ................................... 280, 290
Brake fluid ..................................... 284
Brake pads ..................................... 283
Coolant .......................................... 288
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps ............................................. 295
Cruise control ................................ 278
Distronic ........................................ 278
Doors ............................................. 286
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 286
EBP ................................................ 284
Engine oil ....................................... 291
ESP® ...................................... 273, 284
Fog lamps .............................. 293, 294
Front passenger front air bag ........ 275
Gas cap .......................................... 292
High-beam lamps ........................... 294
Hood .............................................. 286
License plate lamps ....................... 294
Light sensor ................................... 294
Low-beam lamps ............................ 294
Parking brake ................................ 284
Parking lamps ................................ 294
PRE-SAFE® .................................... 274
Reserve fuel ................................... 291
Reverse lamp ................................. 293
Side marker lamps ......................... 293
SmartKey ............................... 286, 287
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 286
SRS ................................................ 285
Tailgate .......................................... 286
Tail lamps ...................................... 295
Tele Aid .......................................... 285
Tire inflation pressure ............ 281, 296
Tire pressure monitor .................... 281
Tires ...................................... 281, 296
Trailer brake lamps ........................ 295
Trailer tail lamps ............................ 295
Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 295
Turn signals ................................... 296
Washer fluid ................................... 288
Multifunction steering wheel
Adjustment ...................................... 86
Buttons .......................................... 119
Cleaning ......................................... 265
Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 87, 136
Gearshift control ............................ 115
Heating ............................................ 88
Memory function .............................. 92
Overview .......................................... 30
N
Navigation menu ............................... 127
Navigation system
see Separate operating instructions
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ............................................. 53
Resetting ....................................... 309
Nets, parcel ....................................... 188
Night security illumination .............. 134
Normal occupant weight .................. 241
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) ................................................... 347
O
Occupant Classification System
see OCS (Occupant Classification
System)
Occupant distribution ....................... 241
Occupant safety
Air bags ........................................... 37
BabySmart™ .................................... 46
Children and air bags ....................... 37
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59
Fastening the seat belts ................... 50
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (Canada
only) ........................................ 46, 305
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 305
Infant and child restraint systems .... 56
Introduction ..................................... 36
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ........................................... 42
PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 52
Seat belts .................................. 39, 48
13
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
14
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 14
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ................................................ 42
Self-test ........................................... 45
Odometer ........................................... 121
Off-road driving ................................. 248
Checklist ............................... 249, 253
Crossing obstacles ........................ 252
Driving instructions ........................ 248
Driving on sand .............................. 252
Driving through water .................... 251
Returning ....................................... 253
Ruts ............................................... 253
Steep terrain .................................. 250
Off-road driving program .................. 155
Off-road Mode menu ......................... 125
Oil, oil level
see Engine oil
On-board computer
see Control system
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 115
Operating safety .................................. 23
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 262
Outside temperature
see Displays
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
P
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 261
Paintwork code ................................. 347
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Parcel nets ......................................... 188
Parking ............................................... 107
Parktronic system .......................... 160
Parking brake ............................ 107, 247
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 284
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 90
Transmission position .................... 112
Parktronic system
Cleaning system sensors ............... 263
Malfunction .................................... 163
Minimum distance ......................... 161
Sensor range ................................. 161
Switching on/off ........................... 162
System sensors ............................. 160
Warning indicators ................... 27, 161
Parts service ...................................... 346
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(Canada only)
see Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp (Canada only)
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(USA only)
see Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp (USA only)
Passenger safety
see Occupant safety
Pedals ................................................. 244
Phone
see Telephone
Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 264
Power assistance .............................. 244
Power outlets .................................... 197
Power seats
see Seats
Power tailgate
Closing ............................................. 76
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 286
Opening ........................................... 76
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operation ....................................... 184
Synchronizing ................................ 186
Power washer .................................... 261
Power windows ................................. 100
Cleaning ......................................... 264
Operation ....................................... 100
Rear door window, override
switch .............................................. 60
Synchronizing ................................ 102
Practical hints ................................... 268
Preglow indicator lamp .............. 29, 104
PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 274
Problems
While driving .................................. 106
With vehicle ..................................... 23
With wipers .................................... 100
Product information ............................ 20
Production options weight ............... 241
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 15
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Index
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program ................ 114
Manual shift program ..................... 116
Proximity key
see Key, SmartKey
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 241
R
RACETIMER ........................................ 124
Radiator ..................................... 214, 242
Radio
Selecting stations .......................... 126
Radio transmitters ............................ 257
Rain sensor
see Intermittent wiping
Rear axle oil ....................................... 357
Rear center console ashtray
see Ashtrays
Rear doors
Child safety locks ............................ 60
Rear door window
Override switch ................................ 60
Rear fog lamp
see Fog lamps
Rear lamps
see Tail lamps
Rear seat head restraints
see Head restraints
Rear view camera .............................. 163
Cleaning the camera lens .............. 263
Rear window defroster ..................... 183
Rear window wiper/washer ............. 100
Recommended tire inflation
pressure ..................................... 219, 241
Refilling
AdBlue® ......................................... 332
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 359
Refueling ............................................ 210
Regular checks .................................. 212
Reminder, Seat belt
see Seat belts, Telltale
Remote control
see Key, SmartKey
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 203
Replacing
Key .................................................. 74
Replacing bulbs ................................. 311
Reporting safety defects .................... 24
Research Octane Number
see RON
Reserve fuel
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 291
Warning lamp ................................... 29
Reset button ................................ 28, 118
Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front
head restraints) ................................. 309
Restraint systems
see Occupant safety
Rims ........................................... 241, 352
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 201
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 360
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 264
Run-flat tires
see MOExtended tires
S
Safety
Driving safety systems ..................... 61
Occupant safety ............................... 36
Reporting defects ............................ 24
Safety belts
see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52
Seat belts ............................................. 48
Adjustment function ........................ 51
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Cleaning ......................................... 265
Fastening ......................................... 50
Height adjustment ........................... 51
Proper use of ................................... 48
Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Safety notes ..................................... 48
Telltale ..................................... 29, 300
Seat heating ......................................... 86
Seating capacity ................................ 228
Seats ..................................................... 81
Adjustment ...................................... 81
Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 87
Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 189
Heating ............................................ 86
Memory function .............................. 92
Multicontour seat ............................ 85
Ventilation ....................................... 85
15
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 16
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
16
Index
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Selective setting
see Key, SmartKey
Selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Self-test
BabySmart™ .................................... 47
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) ........................................... 45
Tele Aid .......................................... 199
Service
see Maintenance
Service, parts .................................... 346
Service and warranty information ..... 20
Service intervals
see Maintenance System, Service
indicator message
Service life (tires) .............................. 232
Settings
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 72
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71
Memory function .............................. 92
Menu ............................................. 129
Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73
Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71
Side impact air bags ........................... 40
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 293
Sidewall (tires) .................................. 241
SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
see Key, SmartKey
Snow chains ...................................... 243
Snow tires
see Winter tires
Spare wheel ....................................... 352
Mounting ....................................... 324
Storage location ............................ 271
Speedometer ............................... 28, 146
Speed settings
Cruise control ................................ 142
Distronic ........................................ 148
Resume function ................... 143, 149
Sport Utility Vehicle
see SUV
SRS
Indicator lamp ................... 29, 36, 301
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 285
Standing water, driving through ...... 247
Starter switch positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 80
SmartKey ......................................... 79
Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 105
Starting the engine ........................... 103
Steering column
see Multifunction steering wheel,
Adjustment
Steering wheel
see Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 115
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 204
Storage compartments ..................... 192
Storing tires ....................................... 233
Stranded vehicle ............................... 342
Sunroof
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Sun visors .......................................... 195
Suspension tuning
see Air suspension program
SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ................. 22
T
Tachometer .................................. 29, 119
Overspeed range ........................... 119
Tailgate
Closing ............................................. 75
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 286
Opening ........................................... 75
Power tailgate .................................. 76
Unlocking manually ....................... 307
Tail lamps ........................................... 312
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 295
Tar stains ........................................... 261
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 359
Brake fluid ..................................... 359
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 17
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Capacities fuels, coolants,
lubricants etc. ................................ 356
Coolant .......................................... 362
Engine oil additives ........................ 359
Engine oils ..................................... 359
Fuel requirements .......................... 360
Gasoline additives .......................... 361
Identification labels ....................... 346
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 360
Rims and tires ................................ 352
Spare wheel ................................... 356
Vehicle specification ML 350 ......... 348
Vehicle specification
ML 350 4MATIC ............................. 349
Vehicle specification
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC ............... 348
Vehicle specification
ML 550 4MATIC ............................. 350
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG . . 351
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................... 358, 364
Technical data (dimensions)
see Vehicle specification
Technical data (electrical system)
see Vehicle specification
Technical data (engine)
see Vehicle specification
Technical data (weights)
see Vehicle specification
Tele Aid ............................................... 199
Emergency calls ............................. 200
Information button ......................... 202
Initiating an emergency call
manually ........................................ 201
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 285
Remote door unlock ...................... 203
Roadside Assistance button .......... 201
Search & Send ............................... 203
SOS button .................................... 201
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 204
System self-test ............................. 199
Telephone ............................................. 30
Answering/ending a call ................ 140
Hands-free microphone ................... 33
Menu ............................................. 139
Operation ....................................... 139
Phone book .................................... 140
Redialing ........................................ 141
Temperature
Interior temperature .............. 170, 179
Outside .................................. 123, 131
Tether anchorage points
see Children in the vehicle
Tie-down rings ................................... 188
Tightening torque
Wheels ........................................... 330
Time setting ....................................... 132
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 241
Tire and Loading Information
placard ............................................... 227
Tire and loading terminology ........... 239
TIREFIT ............................................... 320
Tire Identification Number
see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking ........................................ 221
Important notes on ........................ 220
Label on the inside of fuel filler
flap ................................................ 220
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 227
Tire labeling ....................................... 235
Tire load rating .................................. 240
Tire ply composition and material
used .................................................... 241
Tire pressure loss warning system . 222
Tire repair kit
see TIREFIT
Tires ........................................... 218, 352
Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (Advanced
TPMS) ............................................ 223
Air pressure ................................... 219
Care and maintenance ................... 232
Cleaning ......................................... 233
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 231
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure ........................................ 220
Inflation pressure ........................... 221
Information placard ....................... 227
Inspection ...................................... 232
Labeling ......................................... 235
Load index ............................. 236, 240
Load rating .................................... 240
17
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 18
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
18
Index
Messages in the multifunction
display ................................... 281, 296
MOExtended .................................. 352
Ply composition and material
used ............................................... 241
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 221
Retreads ........................................ 218
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 352
Rotation ......................................... 234
Service life ..................................... 232
Sizes .............................................. 352
Snow chains .................................. 243
Speed rating .......................... 237, 241
Storing ........................................... 233
Temperature .......................... 220, 234
Terminology ................................... 239
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320
Tire Identification Number ............. 241
Tire pressure loss warning system . 222
TPMS low tire pressure/
malfunction telltale ........................ 304
Traction ................................. 233, 241
Tread ............................................. 242
Tread depth ........................... 232, 242
Treadwear ...................................... 233
Treadwear indicators ............. 232, 242
Vehicle maximum load on .............. 242
Wear pattern .................................. 234
Winter tires ............................ 242, 352
Tire speed rating ....................... 237, 241
Tongue Weight Rating
see TWR
Top tether
see Children in the vehicle
Total load limit ................................... 241
Towing
Towing eye bolt .............................. 339
Trailer .................................... 113, 254
Vehicle ........................................... 338
Towing eye bolt ................................. 339
Traction ...................................... 233, 241
Trailer towing ............................ 113, 254
Coupling a trailer ........................... 255
Decoupling ..................................... 257
Electrical connections .................... 254
Towing ........................................... 256
Trailer hitch ................................... 254
Weights and ratings ....................... 254
Transfer case ..................................... 117
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission fluid level .................... 216
Transmission gear selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Transmission positions .................... 112
Traveling abroad ............................... 257
Tread (tires) ....................................... 242
Tread depth (tires) .................... 232, 242
Treadwear .......................................... 233
Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 232, 242
Trip computer menu ......................... 138
Trip odometer, resetting ................... 118
Turning off the engine ...................... 108
Turn signals ......................................... 95
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 296
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 242
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .................................. 233, 242
Units
Selecting digital speedometer
display mode ................................. 131
Selecting speedometer/
odometer display mode ................. 131
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 360
Unlocking the vehicle
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Manually ........................................ 306
SmartKey ......................................... 70
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 265
Useful features .................................. 194
V
Vehicle
Battery ........................................... 334
Care ............................................... 260
Control system .............................. 119
Identification Number (VIN) ........... 346
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Lowering (wheel change) ............... 329
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 19
Version: 2.11.8.1
Index
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety .............................. 23
Towing ........................................... 338
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 306
Vehicle configuration menu ............. 137
Vehicle dimensions
see Vehicle specification
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ................................................... 346
Vehicle jack
see Jack
Vehicle level control
see Air suspension program
Vehicle lighting .................................... 92
Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
Carriers .......................................... 187
Instructions .................................... 186
Load limit ....................................... 228
Terminology ................................... 239
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 242
Vehicle specification
ML 350 .......................................... 348
ML 350 4MATIC ............................. 349
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC ............... 348
ML 550 4MATIC ............................. 350
ML 63 AMG ................................... 351
Vehicle status message memory .... 128
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 268
Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
Vehicle weights
see Vehicle specification
W
Warning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function ............. 151
Distronic ........................................ 146
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
Parking brake ................................ 284
Parktronic system .......................... 163
Seat belt telltale ............................ 300
Warranty coverage ............................ 346
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 364
Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 288
Mixing ratio .................................... 364
Refilling .......................................... 217
Washing the vehicle .......................... 260
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 234
Weights (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Wheel
Changing ....................................... 319
Removing ....................................... 327
Spare ............................................. 319
Tightening torque ........................... 330
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 352
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 218
Window curtain air bags ..................... 41
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 264
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 264
Infrared reflecting .......................... 208
Washer fluid ................................... 364
Wipers ............................................. 98
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades .................. 318
Winter cover .............................. 214, 242
Winter driving
Instructions .................................... 243
Radiator cover ............................... 242
Snow chains .................................. 243
Tires ............................................... 242
Winter tires ................................ 242, 352
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 266
19
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
20
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 20
Version: 2.11.8.1
Introduction
Product Information
Please observe the following in your own best
interest:
We recommend using Genuine MercedesBenz Parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for your
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be held
responsible for them, even if in individual
cases an official approval or authorization by
governmental or other agencies should exist.
Use of such parts and accessories could
adversely affect the safety, performance or
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use
them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and preapproved conversion parts and accessories
are available at any authorized MercedesBenz Center. In addition, you will receive
comprehensive information on permissible
technical modifications and expert
installations.
Operator’s Manual
Notes
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the
instructions and warnings contained in this
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage
caused by failure to follow instructions is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
We continuously strive to improve our
product and ask for your understanding that
we reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations, and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
vehicle.
Vehicle equipment
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
operating particular equipment, any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to demonstrate the proper procedures.
Optional equipment is also described in this
manual, including operating instructions
wherever necessary. Since they are specialorder items, the descriptions and illustrations
herein may vary slightly from the actual
equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not
shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
including:
RNew
Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 21
Version: 2.11.8.1
Introduction
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty1
RState
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a
reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
or malfunction has been subject to repair
two or more times, and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly
notified us in writing of the need for its
repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
1
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in
accordance with standard program
guidelines which include providing service to
the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
a paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
in our ability to respond.
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
21
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
22
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 22
Version: 2.11.8.1
Introduction
determined by our authorized technician and
tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (in the USA) or the
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
RService facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
RUnleaded
gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts.
RGasoline
may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
Sport Utility Vehicle
G Warning!
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
drive passenger cars are not intended. This
vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
from conventional passenger cars in driving
conditions which may occur on streets,
highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Operator’s Manual. Take time to become
familiar with the driving characteristics of this
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Do not
attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 23
Version: 2.11.8.1
Introduction
Operating safety
G Warning!
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Such blows can be caused, for example, by
running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Rturn
on your hazard warning flashers
Rslow
down carefully
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the road
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
familiar with the following information and
rules:
Rthe
safety precautions in this manual
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
Rtraffic
rules and regulations
Rmotor
vehicle laws and safety standards
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
make you and others aware of various risks.
Do not remove any of these warning labels
unless explicitly instructed to do so by
information on the label itself. Removing
warning labels may cause you and others to
be unaware of certain risks which may result
in an accident and/or personal injury.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected if required. If the matter is not
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at
one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Z
23
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
24
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 24
Version: 2.11.8.1
Introduction
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966”.
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith
the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin
response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor
use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras
otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 25
Version: 2.11.8.1
25
Exterior view .......................................
Cockpit .................................................
Instrument cluster ..............................
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Center console ....................................
Overhead control panel ......................
Door control panel ..............................
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
At a glance
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
26
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 26
Version: 2.11.8.1
Exterior view
At a glance
Exterior view
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function
Page
:
Tailgate
Power tailgate
75
76
;
Rear window defroster
183
=
Rear window wiper/washer
Wiper blade, replacing
Wiper blade, cleaning
100
318
264
?
Rear lamps
311
A
Fuel filler flap
210
B
Doors:
Locking and unlocking
Function
Page
F
Hood
212
G
Wipers
Wiper blades, replacing
Wiper blades, cleaning
98
318
264
H
Windshield:
Wiping with washer fluid
Cleaning
99
264
I
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
184
J
Carriers
187
70,
306
K
Tires and wheels
Rims and tires
218
352
89
L
Headlamp cleaning system
96
M
Front fog lamp
95
C
Exterior rear view mirrors
D
Towing eyes
339
E
Front lamps
311
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 27
Version: 2.11.8.1
Cockpit
27
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
:
Cruise control lever:
Cruise control
Distronic
Page
Function
Page
I
Starter switch
79
141
144
J
Steering wheel adjustment,
manual
86
;
Instrument cluster
28,
117
K
On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
=
Multifunction steering
wheel
30,
119
L
Hood lock release
212
?
Horn
M
Parking brake release
107
A
Steering wheel gearshift
control
N
Parking brake pedal
107
115
O
Door control panel
33
B
Gear selector lever
109
P
Exterior lamp switch
93
C
Front Parktronic warning
indicators
Q
161
D
Overhead control panel
32
Steering wheel adjustment,
electrical
Heated steering wheel
86
88
E
Glove box lid release, glove
box lock
193
F
Glove box
192
Combination switch:
Turn signals
Wipers
High beam
95
98
96
G
Power outlet
197
H
Center console
R
31
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 28
Version: 2.11.8.1
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
:
# Left turn signal
indicator lamp
;
To dim instrument cluster
illumination
118
Reset button for:
Trip odometer
Settings
118
129
To brighten instrument
cluster illumination
118
=
?
2
3
Page
A
! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
B
Clock
C
Speedometer with:
! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp
È Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
Function
$ Brake warning lamp,
USA only
d ESP® warning lamp
· Distance warning
lamp3
J Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
h Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale, USA
only
Page
299
301
302
299
223,
304
132
298
Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should
go out when the engine is running.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 29
Version: 2.11.8.1
29
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
D
E
Multifunction display with:
Trip odometer
Main odometer
Tachometer with:
7 Seat belt telltale
% Preglow indicator
lamp, diesel engine only
or
é Recuperative Brake
System (RBS) warning
lamp, ML 450 HYBRID only4
+ Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp
L Low-beam headlamp
indicator lamp
; Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Canada only
! Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA only
K High-beam headlamp
indicator lamp
4
Page
Function
Fuel gauge with: Fuel tank
reserve warning lamp
8 Fuel filler flap
indicator: The fuel filler flap
is located on the rear righthand side.
118
121
51,
300
G
104
36,
301
93
303
303
Multifunction display with:
Outside temperature
indicator or digital
speedometer (depending
on selected setting in the
control system)
Transmission position
indicator
Gear range indicator
Automatic transmission
program mode indicator
Rear window wiper
indicator
Downhill Speed Regulator
(DSR) indicator
Off-road driving program
indicator
Page
303
123,
131
112
114
114
100
153
155
96
See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 30
Version: 2.11.8.1
Multifunction steering wheel
30
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Multifunction display
;
Press button ~:
to end a call
to reject an incoming call
Press button 6:
to answer a call
to dial5
to redial5
Press button W or X:
to select submenus in the
Settings menu
to set values
to set the volume
Press button ? to turn
the Voice Control System
on6, see separate operating
instructions.
=
5
6
Press button V or U
to select next/previous
menu.
Page
121
139
139
139
139
139
Function
Press button & or *
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu
Press and hold button
& or *:
to select previous or next
track with quick search or
to select previous or next
station in station list or
wave band within Audio/
DVD menu
to start the quick search in
the phone book within
Telephone menu
Press button A to turn
the Voice Control System
off6, see separate operating
instructions.
130
119
Function only available in telephone menu.
Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
Page
126
139
126
139
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 31
Version: 2.11.8.1
Center console
Center console
Function
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
(Canada only)
Upper part
192
E
Alarm system indicator
lamp
67
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch
64
I
Seat heating, driver’s side
86
J
Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR)
ML 450 HYBRID: Parktronic
system deactivation switch
L
Climate control system
Rear window defroster
=
Seat heating, front
passenger side
86
Seat ventilation, front
passenger side
85
?
A
7
K
;
Parktronic system
deactivation switch
ML 450 HYBRID: Fuel filler
flap switch7
156
85
Page
COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch
Seat ventilation, driver’s
side
H
:
46,
305
Storage compartment
G
Function
Page
D
F
165
183
Hazard warning flasher
switch
Switch for off-road driving
program
ML 63 AMG: Program mode
selector switch for
automatic transmission
ML 450 HYBRID: Program
mode selector switch for
automatic transmission7
152
160
96
155
115
162
B
Vehicle level control switch
156
C
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA
only)
42,
305
31
See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.
Z
At a glance
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
32
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 32
Version: 2.11.8.1
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
At a glance
Lower part
Function
Ashtray with storage
compartment
Cigarette lighter
196
196
;
Cup holder
194
=
Front armrest storage
compartment
192
Removable card/ticket
holder
194
:
?
Function
Page
Page
Left front reading lamp on/
off
97
;
Automatic interior lighting
97
=
Rear interior lighting on/off
97
?
Front interior lighting on/
off
97
A
Right reading lamp on/off
97
B
Front right interior lamp
97
C
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch
184
SOS button (Tele Aid
system)
201
:
D
E
Interior rear view mirror
89
F
Reading lamps
97
G
Garage door opener
204
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 33
Version: 2.11.8.1
Door control panel
H
Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
Voice Control System, see
separate operating
instructions
I
Front left interior lamp
Page
Door control panel
At a glance
Function
33
97
Function
Page
:
Inside door handle
74
;
Central locking/unlocking
switch
75
Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
89
=
?
A
B
C
Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors
89
91
Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows
100
Rear door window override
switch
60
Remote tailgate switch,
power tailgate
78
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
34
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 34
Version: 2.11.8.1
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 35
Version: 2.11.8.1
35
Vehicle equipment ..............................
Occupant safety ..................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Driving safety systems .......................
Anti-theft systems ..............................
36
36
61
61
66
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
36
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 36
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment
Safety and security
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Occupant safety
Introduction
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are:
RSeat
RChild
belts
restraints
RLower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH)
G Warning!
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint system components
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
although the deceleration threshold for air
bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
tamper with electronic components or their
software.
i See “Children in the vehicle”
(Y page 55) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
the vehicle
Rrestraint systems for infants and children
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with
-
Air bags
-
Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
-
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts
-
Seat belt force limiter
RNECK-PRO
active front head restraints
RPreventive
occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®)
RAir
-
bag system components with
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
-
USA only: Front passenger seat with
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
-
Canada only: Front passenger seat with
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
SRS indicator lamp
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
instrument cluster comes on when the
ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
+ is not lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the SRS indicator lamp +
Rfails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was started
Rdoes
not come on at all
Rcomes
on after the engine was started or
while driving
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 37
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
G Warning!
The SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp
+:
Rdoes
not come on at all
Rdoes
not go out after 4 seconds after the
engine was started
Rcomes
on while driving
For your safety, we strongly recommend that
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS
might also deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury
as well.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work
on the SRS must therefore only be performed
by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
G Warning!
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain
Rfrontal
impacts (front air bags)
Rside
impacts (side impact air bags and
window curtain air bags)
Rrollovers
(window curtain air bags)
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or door.
G Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
and front passenger to always be in a properly
seated position and to wear their respective
seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the seat backrest.
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
RMove
the driver’s seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
You should be able to accomplish this by
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
Z
37
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
38
Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 38
Version: 2.11.8.1
RKeep
hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
the rim can increase the risk and potential
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates.
There is a possibility for a side impact air bagrelated injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or restrained
when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1)
RAdjust
the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
ROccupants,
especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
RCanada
only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system installed in the vehicle
to deactivate the front passenger front air
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
they will be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.
(2)
Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
children 12 years old and under,
use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the
size and weight of the child.
Always wear seat belts properly.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
Rfrontal
impacts (front air bags)
Rside
impacts (side impact and window
curtain air bags) if the system determines
the need for air bag deployment
Rrollovers
(window curtain air bags)
Only in the event of such a situation will they
provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always
wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
possible for the air bags to provide their
supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
bags will not deploy. The driver and
passengers will then be protected to the
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
It is important to your safety and that of your
passengers to have deployed air bags
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 39
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
air bags will continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
and air bag
G Warning!
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir
bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that has deployed must be replaced. PRESAFE® has electrically operated reversible
pre-tensioners in addition to the
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RDo
not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo
not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
RNo
modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo no change or remove any component or
part of the SRS.
RDo
not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
39
cover, outboard sides of the seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
trims.
RDo
not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RDo
not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around in
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RImproper
repair work on the SRS creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RFor
your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RGiven
the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
recommend that you inform the subsequent
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
Also refer them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
40
Occupant safety
Front air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 40
Version: 2.11.8.1
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rvehicles
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger
front air bag ; are designed to provide
increased protection for the driver and front
passenger against the risk of injuries to the
head and thorax.
Driver and front passenger front air bags are
deployed
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending
on whether the respective seat
belt is in use
Rindependently
of the side impact air bags
and/or the window curtain air bags
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the air bags to have different rates of inflation.
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag
control unit.
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front
passenger front air bag deployment is
additionally influenced by the passenger’s
weight category as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42).
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the
vehicle deceleration rate required for second
stage inflation of the front passenger front air
bag.
with OCS, USA only: the system,
based on OCS weight sensor readings,
detects that the front passenger seat is
occupied
Rthe
42 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit
(USA only: (Y page 42),
Canada only: (Y page 46))
Rthe
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
Side impact air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
G Warning!
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or door
trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side
impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 41
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
the preset deployment threshold for the side
impact air bags.
! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; are designed to provide
increased protection for the thorax but not
the head, neck and arms.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron
the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin
instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
Window curtain air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently
of the front air bags
Rindependently
of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the
front passenger side impact air bag will
deploy independently of the empty seat.
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
properly inserted into the buckle.
The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold.
The side impact air bags will not deploy in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
Window curtain air bags : are designed to
provide increased protection for the head but
not the chest or arms.
Window curtain air bags : are deployed
Ron
the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin
instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rindependently
of the front air bags
Z
Safety and security
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
41
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
42
Occupant safety
Rregardless
of whether the front passenger
seat is occupied
Rin
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 42
Version: 2.11.8.1
certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
determines that air bag deployment can
offer additional protection to that provided
by the seat belt
Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
deployment threshold.
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
indicated by the arrows.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
standard equipment in USA.
The OCS activates or deactivates the front
passenger front air bag automatically. The
respective status is based on the classified
occupant weight category determined by
weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
The system does not deactivate
Rthe
front passenger side impact air bag
Rthe
window curtain air bag
Rthe
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit
Rwith
the seat belt properly fastened
Rin
a position that is as upright as possible
with the back against the seat backrest
Rwith
the feet on the floor
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may
appear to increase or decrease due to the
following:
Robjects
hanging on the seat
Robjects
lodged underneath the seat
Robjects
stuffed between the seat and
middle console
Robjects
Rother
stuffed between the seat and door
passengers pushing on the seat
Robjects
applying pressure to the back of
the seat
Always make sure the seat has clearance
in all directions at all times.
If your seat, including the trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should always use the 42
indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly
positioned.
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp
illuminates when an adult or someone larger
than a small individual is in the front
passenger seat, have the front passenger
reposition himself or herself in the seat until
the 42 indicator lamp goes out,
or check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS has classified the
front passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-monthold child in a standard child restraint or if the
front passenger seat is classified as being
empty.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 43
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
If the 42 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
is activated and will be deployed
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently
of the side impact air bags
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by
Rthe
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe
front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the OCS
For more information on air bag display
messages in the multifunction display, see
(Y page 275).
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Z
Safety and security
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
will illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the 42 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
as a young teenager or a small adult), the
42 indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine
is started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
illuminated or go out. With the
42 indicator lamp illuminated,
the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. With the 42
indicator lamp out, the front passenger front
air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the 42 indicator lamp
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
when the engine is started and then goes out,
indicating that the front passenger front air
bag is activated.
If the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
is deactivated and will not be deployed.
43
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
44
Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 44
Version: 2.11.8.1
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf
you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 42
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
42 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical 12-monthold child, the front passenger front air bag
may or may not be activated.
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air
bag also should have deployed.
The OCS may have determined
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both of which are instances
where the system suppresses deployment
of the front passenger front air bag even
though the impact met the criteria and was
of sufficient severity to deploy the driver
front air bag
Rthat
the seat was occupied by a small
individual (such as a young teenager or a
small adult) or a child who weighs more
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint – both of
which are instances where the system may
suppress deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
air bag
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 45
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
45
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
42 indicator lamp : will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0.
G Warning!
If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the
instrument cluster and the 42
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
this case. Have the system checked by
qualified technicians as soon as possible.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS:
RDo
not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the parcel net on the back of the front
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may
not be able to properly approximate the
occupant weight category.
RDo
not place objects under and/or around
the front passenger seat.
RDo
not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
RDo not stuff objects such as books between
the front passenger seat and the center
console or front passenger door.
RDo
not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
RRead
and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
OCS Self-test
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 42 indicator lamp
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system classifies the occupant as an adult,
the 42 indicator lamp will
illuminate and go out after approximately
6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
classifies the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 42 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 305).
G Warning!
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and
back of the child seat must make full contact
with the passenger seat cushion and
backrest.
Z
Safety and security
RWhile
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Safety and security
46
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 46
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
seat backrest.
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
child seat, which operates with the
BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle
to deactivate the front passenger front air
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
they will be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
system
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
is standard equipment in Canada.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RChildren 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a MercedesBenz authorized BabySmart™ compatible
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf
you must install a BabySmart™
compatible rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 42 indicator lamp
not illuminate or go out while the restraint
is installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 42
indicator lamp while driving to make sure
the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 42 indicator
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 47
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
the 42 indicator lamp remains
illuminated.
Please be sure to check the 42
indicator lamp every time you use a
BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the
front passenger seat. Should the
42 indicator lamp go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. If the 42 indicator
lamp remains out, do not use the
BabySmart™ restraint to transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
The system does not deactivate
Rthe
side impact air bag
Rthe
window curtain air bag
Rthe
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
Self-test BabySmart™ without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 42 indicator lamp
comes on for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes out.
If the 42 indicator lamp should
not come on or is continuously lit, the system
is not functioning. You must see an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (Y page 305).
G Warning!
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
system, are required for use with the
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on availability. With
the special child seat installed properly, the
front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
The 42 indicator lamp : will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0.
47
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 42
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
42 indicator lamp could be
continuously lit, indicating that the system is
not functioning. The front passenger front air
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
deploy in an accident.
G Warning!
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmart™
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Safety and security
48
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 48
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
seat must make full contact with the front
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
child in case of an accident, instead of
protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Seat belts
Safety notes
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all 50
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 55).
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
be considerably more severe without your
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
as intended if the occupants are properly
wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
positioned on the body.
G Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
there are seat belts available. Make sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
G Warning!
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
points must be checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Proper use of seat belts
G Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat
belts can only protect when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 49
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in case
of an accident.
REach
occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
the likelihood of and potential severity of
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
front air bag, side impact air bags, window
curtain air bags for door windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window
curtain air bags and ETDs).
RNever
wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
RPosition
the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
a crash.
49
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake
sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever
use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat
belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
RPregnant
women should also always use a
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck
your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen
using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
RNever
wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
50
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 50
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
Fastening the seat belts
Safety and security
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
G Warning!
Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system, Canada only: Children
12 years old and under must never ride in the
front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child
seat, which operates with the BabySmart™
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate
the front passenger front air bag when it is
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
will result.
X
With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
of seat belt outlet :.
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
clicks.
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
belts on both front seats adjust to the
upper body automatically as necessary
(Y page 51).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
correct height (Y page 51).
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
belt have special seat belt retractors to
secure child restraints properly. For more
information on special seat belt retractors,
see “Infant and child restraint system”
(Y page 56).
To release the seat belt with seat belt release
button ?, see (Y page 51).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 51
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
Releasing the seat belts
X
Press seat belt release button ?
(Y page 50).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
(Y page 50).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts
X
Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height
adjuster upward.
The seat belt outlet height adjuster
engages in different positions.
X
Lowering: Press and hold release
button :.
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster
downward.
X Release button : and make sure the seat
belt outlet height adjuster engages into
place.
Seat belt adjustment function
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the
seat belts on both front seats to the upper
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that
purpose when
Ryou
engage the latch plate into the buckle
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2
Rthe
SmartKey in the starter switch is in
position 2 and you then engage the latch
plate in the buckle
The seat belt adjustment function takes place
with a certain amount of retracting force
when the system senses slack between the
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You
can activate or deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function via the control system
(Y page 136).
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
damage the seat belt and impair its
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
after approximately 6 seconds or once the
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
front doors closed,
Rthe
seat belt telltale 7 remains
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
Rand
if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
7 starts flashing and a warning chime
sounds with increasing intensity for a
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
Z
Safety and security
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
51
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Safety and security
52
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 52
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
If you and/or your passenger release the
seat belt during driving, the seat belt
telltale 7 starts flashing and the
warning chime sounds as described before.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
continues to be illuminated.
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(Y page 300).
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front seats and rear
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
belt force limiters.
The ETDs are designed to activate in the
following cases:
Rin
frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
the system’s preset deployment threshold
Rin
side impacts exceeding the system’s
preset deployment threshold on the far
side of the impact
Rin
certain vehicle rollovers
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
lamp” (Y page 36)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belts
fastened.
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
limiters, when activated, are employed to
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull occupants back
toward the seat backrest.
G Warning!
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
instructions. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
not require replacement after activation.
Preventive occupant safety (PRESAFE®)
G Warning!
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
the effects of an accident on vehicle
occupants who are wearing their seat belt
properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
personal injuries occurring as a result of an
accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
always drive carefully and adjust your driving
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
conditions.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 53
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive
measures to better protect the occupants
from the possibility of personal injuries in the
following hazardous situations:
! When moving the seats, make sure there
Remergency
For information on the seat belt adjustment
function as an integrated comfort feature of
PRE-SAFE®, see (Y page 51).
braking maneuvers with the
Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 63)
activated
dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle has been caused to
understeer or oversteer because it has
exceeded its physical limitations or in case
of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds
above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h)
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
Rcritical
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
when it is activated:
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
automatically.
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory
function: If the passenger seat is in an
unfavorable position, the seat will be
adjusted to a position that seeks to better
protect the occupant.
RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
situation, the door windows close, except
for a minimal gap that remains open.
RVehicles
with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If
the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
situation, the tilt/sliding sunroof also
closes, except for a minimal gap that
remains open.
If the closing procedure of any of these
elements is blocked, it will stop and open
slightly.
Once the hazardous situation no longer exists
and an accident has been avoided, the seat
belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. All of the
PRE-SAFE® settings can be re-adjusted
following the critical driving event.
If the seat belts do not release:
X
Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension is
reduced.
The locking mechanism releases.
53
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints
The NECK-PRO active front head restraints
are intended to offer the driver and front
passenger increased protection from
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rearend collision, the NECK-PRO active front head
restraints on the front seats are designed to
move forward in the direction of travel. They
thus provide the head with increased support
earlier on in the collision sequence. The
NECK-PRO active front head restraints will
move forward whether the seats are occupied
or not.
G Warning!
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECKPRO active front head restraints may not be
able to function properly or offer the intended
degree of protection they were designed for
in the event of a rear-end collision.
G Warning!
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
interfere with or prevent the activation of the
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
or the deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
When the NECK-PRO active front head
restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Safety and security
54
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 54
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
active front head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
“Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 309).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
For information on head restraint adjustment,
see “Head restraint height” (Y page 83), or
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”
(Y page 83).
Correct driver seat adjustment
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
Rseat
G Observe Safety notes, see page 86.
X
Position steering wheel : properly. See
(Y page 87) for manual adjustment and
(Y page 87) for electrical adjustment.
Make sure:
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
RYou
restraint adjustment
Rsteering
wheel adjustment
view mirror adjustment
Rfastening
of seat belts
can move your legs freely.
RAll
displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.
adjustment
Rhead
Rrear
Steering wheel
Seat belt
G Observe Safety notes, see page 48.
X
Fasten and position your seat belt ;
correctly (Y page 50).
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 55
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
Make sure:
RThe
seat belt is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust
the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
as possible on your hips.
Seat and head restraint
G Observe Safety notes, see page 81.
X
Position seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 82) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways
be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust
the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
RThe
seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
is as nearly upright as possible.
RAdjust
the seat cushion so that the front
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
your legs.
RAdjust
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RNever
place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while the seat is being
adjusted.
55
Children in the vehicle
Safety notes
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
vehicle:
X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Occupant safety
56
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong braking maneuvers
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 56
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rsudden
Ran
changes of direction
accident
Infant and child restraint systems
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Canada only:
Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in this
vehicle.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
belt have special seat belt retractors for
secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
mounting.
To activate the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract.
During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting
sound can be heard to indicate that the
special seat belt retractor is activated.
The seat belt is now locked.
X Push down on child restraint to take up any
slack.
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
X
Release the seat belt buckle and let the
seat belt retract completely.
The seat belt can then again be used in the
usual manner.
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor
for the front passenger seat, the front
passenger seat must be in the most backward
position.
G Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
retractor will be deactivated.
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 58).
For information on LATCH-type child seat
anchors (Y page 59).
The use of infant or child restraints is required
by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system. They must be properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions for the child restraint. All infant
or child restraint systems must comply with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with these
standards can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 57
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
RUSA
only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
bag technology designed to deactivate the
front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
RUSA
only: For children larger than the
typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not be
activated. Always make sure the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RCanada
only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
operates with the BabySmart™ system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
front passenger front air bag when it is
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
will result.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf
you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 42
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
42 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. During an
Z
Safety and security
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
57
58
Occupant safety
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 58
Version: 2.11.8.1
anchors and rear seats. This can further
reduce the risk of injury.
X
Press in lower part of anchorage ring
cover : on the seat backrest on which a
child seat is to be installed.
X Pull on upper part of anchorage ring
cover : to remove cover.
X Store anchorage ring cover : in a
convenient place (e.g. glove box).
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their
upright position after installing top tether
straps or when the extended cargo
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
seat backrests are secured properly by
pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If
a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
no longer be supported properly or positioned
to provide its intended benefit. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Top tether straps enable an additional
connection to be made between child
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
X
Move the respective head restraint to its
uppermost position (Y page 84).
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 59
Version: 2.11.8.1
Occupant safety
X
Guide top tether strap ? between the
head restraint and top of the seat backrest.
X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of
top tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;.
Make sure
Rhook
= is attached to anchorage ring ;
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated
Rtop
tether strap ? is not twisted
Rthe
head restraint is installed and
positioned such that top tether strap ?
can pass freely between the head restraint
and top of the seat backrest
Rtop
tether strap ? is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo
compartment cover blind (if installed)
Rtop
tether strap ? is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
installed)
X
Lower the head restraint if necessary
(Y page 84).
Make sure the top tether strap can pass
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
anchors.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result in
serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type
anchors for the installation of a LATCH-type
child seat with matching mounting fittings.
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
belt system. Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
The LATCH-type anchors are blended with
covers.
After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap ?:
X
Reinstall anchorage ring cover :.
X
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Remove anchorage ring covers : from
anchors ; of the seat on which a child seat
is to be installed.
G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
Z
59
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Occupant safety
60
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 60
Version: 2.11.8.1
X
Install a LATCH-type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
A rigid connection between the child seat
and the body of the vehicle is established.
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear
center seat can operate freely with a child
seat installed.
Child safety
Child safety locks
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors
enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
X
Securing: Press the lever down in direction
of arrow ;.
X Check to make sure the child safety locks
are working properly.
X
Releasing: Press the lever up in direction
of arrow :.
Override switch
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
you have children riding in the rear passenger
compartment.
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
window opening.
X
Activating: Press override switch :.
The switch engages in recessed position.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 61
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving safety systems
The rear door windows can no longer be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
You can still operate the rear door windows
using the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door.
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
again.
The switch disengages from its recessed
position back to its original position.
The rear door windows can be operated
again using the respective switch located
in the rear doors.
For more information on power windows, see
the “Controls in detail” section
(Y page 100).
Panic alarm
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X
Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
61
Driving safety systems
Introduction
This section contains information about the
following driving safety systems:
RABS
(Antilock Brake System)
RBAS
(Brake Assist System)
REBP
(Electronic Brake Proportioning)
RESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of most of the driving
systems described in this section is only
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
62
Driving safety systems
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains
as required.
Safety notes
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 62
Version: 2.11.8.1
G Warning!
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
RExcessive
RWet
speed, especially in turns
and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing
another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the
driving safety systems described in this
section must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and
objects on the street.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
indicator and warning lamps that may come
on as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
ABS
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
G Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The ABS indicator lamp ! indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
ABS is in the regulating mode.
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
X
Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 63
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving safety systems
G Warning!
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also
switched off. Observe indicator and warning
lamps that may come on as well as messages
in the multifunction display that may appear.
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking distance.
Off-road ABS (vehicles with 4MATIC)
Vehicles with 4MATIC have a special ABS offroad feature. With the off-road driving
program switched on (Y page 155), the ABS
designed for off-road driving is activated
automatically.
When applying the brakes at speeds below
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This will restrict
steering the vehicle.
BAS
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake
boost automatically, thereby potentially
reducing the braking distance.
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
function again as normal. The BAS is then
deactivated.
G Warning!
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
functions, but without the additional brake
boost available that the BAS would normally
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
63
EBP
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
of the braking effort in straight-line braking
without a loss of vehicle stability.
G Warning!
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
still function with full brake boost. However,
the rear wheels could lock up during
emergency braking situations, for example.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
ESP®
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running.
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
from the direction of travel as intended by the
driver. By applying brakes to individual
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
steering maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
Z
Safety and security
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
64
Driving safety systems
G Warning!
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 64
Version: 2.11.8.1
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
RWhen
driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
RWhile
driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt
your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
or the vehicle is being towed with one axle
raised.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Such testing should be no longer than 10
seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
as specified in the “Technical data” section
of this Operator’s Manual.
i The cruise control switches off
automatically when the ESP® engages.
Electronic Traction System
(ETS/4-ETS)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and
4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are
components of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETS
improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
transfer more power to the wheel(s) with
traction.
When you switch off the ESP®, the
ETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
X If conditions require, switch on the off-road
driving program (Y page 155).
Off-road 4-ETS (vehicles with 4MATIC)
With the off-road driving program switched on
(Y page 155), the 4-ETS designed for off-road
use is activated automatically.
Switching off the ESP®
G Warning!
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 65
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving safety systems
65
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
example
Rwhen
driving with snow chains
Rin
deep snow
Rin
sand or gravel
G Warning!
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid
or a wheel is spinning.
When you switch off the ESP®,
Rthe
ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
Rthe
engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip
X
G Warning!
When the ESP® warning lamp d is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Rthe
ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
a spinning wheel
ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Rthe
Rthe
cruise control cannot be activated
Rthe
cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
then not stabilize the vehicle.
With the engine running, press ESP®
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
d in the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
Switching on the ESP®
X
Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving mode
with the ESP® switched on.
Off-road ESP® (vehicles with 4MATIC)
With the off-road driving program switched on
(Y page 155), the ESP® designed for off-road
use is activated automatically. At speeds
below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP® assists in
Z
Safety and security
circumstances described below. Disabling
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
66
Anti-theft systems
over-/understeering, thus improving vehicle
traction.
ESP®
Safety and security
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 66
Version: 2.11.8.1
trailer stabilization
If the trailer you are towing should begin to
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help to
stabilize the rig.
The ESP® will assist you in such situations.
The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to
stabilize.
The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.
G Warning!
The system will not be able to assist when the
trailer jackknifes
ESP®
Rif
the
has switched off due to a
malfunction
Ron
wet or icy roads
Ron
roads with slippery surface
Rin
sand or gravel
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
over before the system recognizes swaying of
the trailer.
Activating
X
With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
X
Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Ra
door
Rthe
tailgate
Rthe
hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element, a door, for example, is closed
immediately.
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Rthe
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
vehicle is opened with the mechanical
key
Ra
door is opened from the inside
To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
(Y page 67).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 67
Version: 2.11.8.1
Anti-theft systems
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
call to the Response Center automatically.
The Tele Aid system will initiate the call
provided that
Ryou
have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service
Rthe
Tele Aid service has been activated
properly
Rthe
necessary mobile phone, power
supply and GPS coverage are available
X
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
within approximately 40 seconds after
unlocking the vehicle:
RThe
vehicle will be locked again.
RThe
anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.
Z
Safety and security
i If the alarm stays on for more than
67
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
68
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 68
Version: 2.11.8.1
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 69
Version: 2.11.8.1
69
Vehicle equipment .............................. 70
Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 79
Seats .................................................... 81
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 86
Mirrors ................................................. 89
Memory function ................................. 92
Lighting ................................................ 92
Wipers .................................................. 98
Power windows ................................. 100
Driving and parking .......................... 103
Automatic transmission ................... 109
Transfer case .................................... 117
Instrument cluster ............................ 117
Control system .................................. 119
Driving systems ................................ 141
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents ............. 165
Climate control ................................. 167
3-zone automatic climate control . . . 173
Rear window defroster ..................... 183
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 184
Loading and storing .......................... 186
Useful features ................................. 194
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Locking and unlocking
70
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 70
Version: 2.11.8.1
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
Rthe
doors
Rthe
tailgate
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Locking and unlocking
Notes
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed.
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey
are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained.
X
Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(Y page 73) and replace them if
necessary.
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door (Y page 306).
X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle
(Y page 307).
X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
: & Lock button
; F Unlock button for tailgate
= % Unlock button
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 71
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
KEYLESS-GO
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
checked every time you grasp an outside door
handle.
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
unlocks
Rthe
doors
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Factory setting
Rthe
tailgate
X
i USA only:
Global unlocking: Press button %.
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe
vehicle will be locked again.
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
X
Global locking: Press button &.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing
button % will then only unlock the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button % once.
X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice.
X Global locking: Press button &.
71
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
72
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 72
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 70).
Find the SmartKey or change its present
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
pocket).
RYou
Controls in detail
RYou
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button &).
RAlways
RIf
you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
turn it off again by
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button
carry the SmartKey with you.
-
RNever
-
-
store the SmartKey together with:
Electronic items such as a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
Metallic objects such as coins or metal
foil
RThe
vehicle could be inadvertently
unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
of the vehicle and
Doing so could impair the function of the
KEYLESS-GO system.
-
an outside door handle is splashed with
water
or
-
you attempt to clean an outside door
handle
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
must be located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
tailgate.
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle
and switch on the ignition once to activate
the KEYLESS-GO function.
RRemember
that the engine can be started
by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
inside the vehicle.
Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey behind when
exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
vehicle will not be locked.
RIf
the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle
cannot be locked or the engine started via
the KEYLESS-GO system.
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
the SmartKey)
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not
Detected appears in the multifunction
display
-
with the engine running, the red message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off
inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
and the automatic transmission is in park
position P
Factory setting
X
Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 73
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe
73
Checking SmartKey batteries
vehicle will be locked again.
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X
X
Global locking: Press lock button : on an
outside door handle.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
handle.
X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door
handle other than the driver’s outside door
handle.
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an
outside door handle.
Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
i You can obtain the required batteries at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button
& or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
Loss of the SmartKey
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement. For
Z
Controls in detail
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
74
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 74
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
information on replacing the SmartKey, see
“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 74).
Controls in detail
Replacing the SmartKey
Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any MercedesBenz Center. In order to do so, the MercedesBenz Center will require proof of identity and
vehicle ownership with original documents,
including the following:
If you are the current owner of the vehicle:
Rthe
vehicle’s current state registration
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
license
If you are an authorized person:
Rthe
vehicle’s current state registration
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
license for the authorized individual
Rsigned
and dated authorization from the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is
being requested
i Duplicated or photocopied
Example illustration driver’s door
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
a door from the inside will trigger the antitheft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 67).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
move up.
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
X Pull on the inside door handle on the
respective rear door.
documentation will not be accepted.
Activating the key
Once you, or an authorized person, has
provided the appropriate documents, the
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it
can be used. In order to do so, the MercedesBenz Center need access to your vehicle.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a door from the inside even
when it is locked unless it is secured with the
child safety lock (Y page 60).
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically
when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked front door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
on a test stand.
i You can also activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking using the control
system (Y page 135).
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 75
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
Tailgate
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
inside using the central locking switches. This
can be useful, for example, if you want to lock
the vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap.
The switches are located in each front door.
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
X
Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
switch :.
You can open a locked front door from the
inside at any time. Open door only when
conditions are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
front door is opened from the inside
Rand
the SmartKey is set to selective
settings, only the front door opened from
the inside is unlocked
X
Pull on handle :.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
X
Pull tailgate upwards to open.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Z
75
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 76
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
76
Controls in detail
Notes for operating the tailgate with the
SmartKey:
You can also open, close, and stop the
tailgate by pressing button F on the
SmartKey.
The prerequisites for this are:
RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
RKEYLESS-GO:
X
Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
handles :.
X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.
Power tailgate
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
! The tailgate swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can
Ropen
and close the tailgate from the inside
and the outside electrically
Rlimit
the opening height of the tailgate
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at
any time by
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted
remote tailgate opening/closing switch
The vehicle’s on-board
electronics must have status 0
(Y page 80).
Opening the tailgate from the outside
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the outside when the
vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
warning sounds.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
handle (Y page 75).
Closing the tailgate from the outside
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
pulling the outside handle on the tailgate
RPress
-
pressing the tailgate closing switch
RPress
-
pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch
-
the tailgate closing switch.
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 77
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the
tailgate will lock automatically when it is
closed. The turn signal lamps flash three
times to confirm locking.
Closing the tailgate and locking the
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
RPress
the tailgate closing switch.
RPress
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull
outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle
simultaneously from the outside using the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
X
Press tailgate closing switch : or press
and hold button F on the SmartKey until
the tailgate begins to close.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
X
Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch : briefly.
The tailgate closes.
Once the tailgate and all doors are closed:
Z
Controls in detail
RPull
77
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
78
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 78
Version: 2.11.8.1
Locking and unlocking
RThe
vehicle locks.
RThe
turn signals flash three times to
confirm locking.
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the driver’s seat when
the vehicle is stationary.
RThe
locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Controls in detail
RThe
anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
The closing process is stopped if the system
cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESSGO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft
(1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing
procedure if necessary.
The tailgate remains unlocked when a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.
Opening/closing the tailgate from the
inside
Opening
G Observe Safety notes, see page 76.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
X
Pull remote tailgate opening/closing
switch : until the tailgate begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
warning sounds.
Closing
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
X Press remote tailgate opening/closing
switch : until the tailgate begins to close.
While the tailgate is closing an acoustic
warning sounds.
X
Interrupting the closing procedure:
Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
closing switch :.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 79
Version: 2.11.8.1
Starter switch positions
Limiting opening height of tailgate
Starter switch positions
You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above
the tailgate is not sufficient.
SmartKey
X
Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear a
short acoustic signal.
The opening height of the tailgate is limited.
The tailgate will now stop at the stored
position when opened.
Deactivating
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear
two short, consecutive acoustic signals.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Controls in detail
Activating
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle
(Y page 75) or press and hold button
F on the SmartKey until the tailgate
opens.
X Stop opening procedure: When the
tailgate is in the desired position, press
tailgate closing switch (Y page 77) or pull
on handle once more.
X You can also press or pull the remote
tailgate opening/closing switch
(Y page 78) to stop the opening procedure.
79
Starter switch
g For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. radio
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after starting
the engine or comes on while driving, refer to
“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 297).
X Always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary.
or
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 80
Version: 2.11.8.1
Starter switch positions
80
X
Get a jump start.
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
Controls in detail
vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start.
KEYLESS-GO
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
without depressing the brake pedal
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 79).
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 103).
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
then insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
; Starter switch
X
Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
into the starter switch (if not inserted
already).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X Do not depress the brake pedal.
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
electrical systems can be switched on or
the engine can be started using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
= USA only
? Canada only
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 81
Version: 2.11.8.1
Seats
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button
more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
Ronce
Rtwice
more the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps (except low-beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high-beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 297).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button once, the power supply is again
switched off.
G Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and seat belts are properly
positioned on the body.
G Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel.
RAdjust
the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
RAdjust
Seats
Safety notes
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible. The center of
the head restraint must support the back of
the head at eye level.
G Warning!
RNever
Rseat
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
adjustment
Rhead
restraint adjustment
Rsteering
Rrear
wheel adjustment
view mirror adjustment
Rfastening
of seat belts
81
place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
82
Seats
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 82
Version: 2.11.8.1
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
Power seats
! When the rear seats are folded forward,
e.g. for cargo volume expansion, the front
seats may not be moved to the rearmost
position. Otherwise you could damage the
front and rear seats.
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
head restraint height, make sure the sun
visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
the uppermost position, it could hit and
damage the sun visor.
i Vehicles without memory function:
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
after either front door has been opened.
The counter resets each time
Ryou
open or close a front door
Ryou
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch
Ryou
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Ryou
switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
the power seats can be operated at any
time when the ignition is switched on.
i The memory function (Y page 92) lets
you store the settings for the seat position
together with the settings for the steering
wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
mirrors.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 83
Version: 2.11.8.1
Seats
83
Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow A.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ?.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow =.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow ; until your
upper legs are lightly supported.
X Head restraint height (vehicles with
memory function): Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow :.
Head restraint height adjustment,
manual
This feature is only available in vehicles
without memory function.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
X
Raising: Adjust the height of head
restraint : by pulling it upward.
If head restraint : is fully retracted, press
release button ; in direction of arrow and
pull head restraint : upward.
X Lowering: Press release button ; in
direction of arrow and press down on head
restraint :.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
System: When adjusting the head restraint,
make sure your fingers do not become caught
between the head restraint cushion and the
monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head
restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that
you have this work carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
While seated, reach behind you with both
hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
restraint cushion to the desired position.
Z
Controls in detail
X
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Seats
84
Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat
lumbar support to help enhance support to
your spine.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 84
Version: 2.11.8.1
G Warning!
Make sure the rear seat head restraints
engage when placing them upright manually.
Otherwise their protective function cannot be
ensured.
The back of the head will not be supported in
the event of a collision. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. Rear seat
occupants can be seriously injured or killed.
Rear seat head restraint height
adjustment
X
Curvature position: Use button : to
move the curvature up and button = to
move it down.
X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to
lessen the curvature and button ? to
increase it.
Rear seat head restraints
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
X
Raising: Pull head restraint : upward to
the desired position.
X Lowering: Press release button ; and
push down on head restraint :.
Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
adjustment
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 85
Version: 2.11.8.1
Seats
85
X
Rear seat head restraints, removing
and installing
X
Switch on the ignition.
Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch :.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using W or X.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion to
the bottom with button ? or to the center
with button =.
X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
side bolsters so that they provide good
lateral support using switch ;.
X
X
Removing: Pull head restraint : to its
uppermost position.
X Press release button ; and pull out head
restraint.
X Installing: Insert head restraint : into
openings on the seat backrest.
X Push head restraint : down until it audibly
engages.
X Press release button ; and adjust head
restraint : to the desired position.
Seat ventilation
Multicontour seats
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into
the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The blue indicator lamps ; in seat ventilation
switch : come on to show which ventilation
level you have selected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
can be activated using the summer opening
feature (Y page 102).
Z
Controls in detail
While seated, reach behind you with both
hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Multifunction steering wheel
86
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 86
Version: 2.11.8.1
Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Press respective seat
ventilation switch :.
Three blue indicator lamps ; in seat
ventilation switch : come on.
X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps ; go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat
ventilating switches off automatically.
Seat heating
Front seat heating switches
The switches for the outboard rear seat
heating are located in the rear center console.
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Press respective seat
heating switch :.
Three red indicator lamps ; in the
respective seat heating switch : come on.
X Continue pressing respective seat heating
switch : until desired seat heating level is
reached.
X Switching off: Press respective seat
heating switch : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps ; go out.
If one or more of indicator lamps ; in
respective seat heating switch : are
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Multifunction steering wheel
Safety notes
G Warning!
Rear seat heating switches
The red indicator lamps ; in front or rear
seat heating switch : come on to show
which heating level you have selected.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 87
Version: 2.11.8.1
Multifunction steering wheel
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows
Ryou
can move your legs freely
Rall
displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
X
Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
stalk in direction of arrows :.
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;.
i You can store the settings for the steering
wheel with the memory function
(Y page 92).
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the
control system (Y page 135).
G Warning!
X
Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to
its stop limit.
X Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
X Locking: Push release handle : back to
its original position.
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely
locked by trying to move it up and down as
well as in and out before driving off.
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress
one of the memory position buttons.
RPress
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
Z
Controls in detail
Make sure
87
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
88
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 88
Version: 2.11.8.1
Multifunction steering wheel
i The last set steering wheel position is
Controls in detail
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
(Y page 92).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly
interrupted when the engine is started.
X
X
i The steering wheel heating may be
suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
heating is suspended when the
temperature of the vehicle interior is above
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
temperature of the steering wheel is above
95‡ (35†).
When these conditions do not apply
anymore, steering wheel heating
continues.
G Warning!
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Crash-responsive exit aid
When you open the driver’s door after an
accident has occurred, the steering column
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
starter switch is insignificant. This function
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
occupants.
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated via the control system.
Heated steering wheel
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
Switch on the ignition.
Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
stalk in direction of arrow :.
Indicator lamp = comes on.
X
Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in direction of arrow ;.
Indicator lamp = goes out.
i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
i The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically when you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
door.
For more information on the steering wheel,
see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 119).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 89
Version: 2.11.8.1
Mirrors
89
Mirrors
Notes
Interior rear view mirror
X
Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
X
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
moving lever : towards the windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
X
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Press button : for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button = for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
Exterior rear view mirrors
G Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
closer than they appear. Check your interior
rear view mirror and glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
! Vehicle with power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors:
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
Z
Controls in detail
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
90
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 90
Version: 2.11.8.1
Mirrors
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Controls in detail
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R or the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position
For more convenient parking, you can set the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
Setting and storing the parking position
X
Switch on the ignition.
Press button =, to select the passengerside exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the preset parking
position.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror with adjustment button ; so
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
The exterior rear view mirror parking
position is stored.
X
Calling up the parking position
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Press button =, to select the passengerside exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the stored parking
position.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 91
Version: 2.11.8.1
Mirrors
The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
returns to its previously stored driving
position
R10
seconds after you have put the gear
selector lever out of reverse gear R
Rimmediately
once your vehicle exceeds a
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rimmediately
when you press button : to
select the driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror
each exterior rear view mirror in completely
(Y page 91).
X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
completely (Y page 91).
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat
the above steps.
Folding in and out manually
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not folded out completely.
Power-folding exterior rear view
mirrors
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
Folding in and out automatically
The function must be activated in the
Convenience submenu (Y page 137).
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in
automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked
from the outside.
The exterior rear view mirrors fold out
automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger
door is subsequently opened.
Synchronizing
The power-folding rear view mirrors may have
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery
has been disconnected or discharged. If the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do the
following:
X Make sure the power-folding function in the
control system is activated (Y page 137).
X When the power-folding function is
activated and the exterior rear view
mirrors still do not fold properly: Fold
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Folding in: Briefly press button :.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
i At speeds above approximately 30 mph
(47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior mirrors in.
X
Folding out: Briefly press button :.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
Then press button : again to fold mirrors
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
Make sure both rear view mirrors are folded
out before driving off.
Z
91
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Lighting
92
Memory function
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
Each memory position button on the driver’s
side can store all of the following settings:
RSeat
position
RSteering
RExterior
Recalling positions from memory
X
Notes
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 92
Version: 2.11.8.1
wheel position
Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved
to the stored position completely. On the
driver’s side, also wait for the steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
move to the stored position.
i Releasing the memory position button
stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Each memory position button on the front
passenger side can store the setting of the
seat position.
Lighting
Notes
i If you drive in countries with left-hand
driving, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon
headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory
X
Adjust the seats.
On the driver’s side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
X
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 93
Version: 2.11.8.1
Lighting
Exterior lamp switch
93
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps
when leaving the vehicle may result in a
discharged battery.
1 W Standing lamps, left
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L.
The following lamps come on:
RLow-beam headlamps
2 X Standing lamps, right
RTail
3 $ Off
4Ã
5T
6L
7N
8R
Daytime running lamp mode
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps
Front fog lamps
Rear fog lamp
i The exterior lamps (except standing
lamps or parking lamps) go out
automatically when you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or open
the driver’s door with the ignition switched
off.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp are switched on and you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
In addition the message Switch Off
Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually.
lamps
RParking
lamps
RLicense
plate lamps
RSide
marker lamps
RInstrument
panel lamps
RGreen
indicator lamp L in the
instrument cluster
X
Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position $.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps come on and go out
automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
RLow-beam
RTail
headlamps
lamps
RParking
lamps
RLicense
plate lamps
RSide
marker lamps
G Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the
headlamps will not automatically come on
under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
L when driving or when traffic and/or
Z
Controls in detail
Low-beam headlamps
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Lighting
94
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 94
Version: 2.11.8.1
ambient lighting conditions require you to do
so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
from position à to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
from à to L will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position Ã.
The following lamps come on and go out
depending on the brightness of the ambient
light with the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button pressed once:
Rtail
lamps
Rparking
lamps
Rlicense
plate lamps
Rside
marker lamps
When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps will also come on and turn off
automatically.
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only
available with the exterior lamp switch in
position L.
Daytime running lamp mode
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default.
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
using the control system, see “Switching
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
only)” (Y page 133).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$ or Ã.
When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps come on.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the
following lamps will come on additionally:
RTail
lamps
RParking
lamps
RLicense
plate lamps
RSide
marker lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
Canada only
With the exterior lamp switch in position
$ or Ã, you cannot switch on the highbeam headlamps.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L to permit activation
of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you
Rshift
from a driving position to park
position P with the vehicle at a standstill or
the parking brake is engaged, the low-beam
headlamps will go out with a delay of
3 minutes
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
and the side marker lamps come on
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
L, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 93).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 95
Version: 2.11.8.1
Lighting
Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position Ã.
G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position à to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from à to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding permissible lamp operation.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
T or L (Y page 93).
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The green indicator lamp N in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
X
Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
green and the yellow indicator lamp R
in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
Locator lighting and night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Switching locator
lighting on or off” (Y page 133) and
“Switching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
off” (Y page 134).
Combination switch
Turn signals
X
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp ! or # in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press the combination
switch only to point of resistance and
Z
Controls in detail
USA only
You can only switch on the high-beam
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L or à to permit
activation of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position T or
L, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 93).
95
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Lighting
96
release. The corresponding turn signal
lamps will flash three times.
High beam
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 96
Version: 2.11.8.1
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L (Y page 93).
X Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
K in the instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow = to its original
position.
X
Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch :.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the
ignition is switched on.
X
Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch : again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic
headlamp mode (Y page 93) or the daytime
running lamp mode (Y page 94).
High-beam flasher
X
Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow =.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps will be cleaned with a highpressure water jet automatically when the
engine is running and you have
Rswitched
on the headlamps
and
Rthe
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
windshield wipers have wiped the
windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 217).
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin
Rat
low ambient lighting conditions
vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 97
Version: 2.11.8.1
Lighting
the front fog lamps switched off
Rwhen
the engine is running
Switching on
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L or Ã.
Switching off
X
Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
X
Steer straight ahead.
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
or
X
Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 94).
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal
comes on.
or
X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
direction.
Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
side of your steering direction comes on.
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
will also go out automatically depending on
the steering angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
temporarily come on on both sides of the
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
out automatically.
Interior lighting in the front
: p Left front reading lamp on/off
; v Rear interior lighting on/off
= ~ Automatic control on/off
? c Front interior lighting on/off
A p Right front reading lamp on/off
B Front interior lighting
C Front reading lamps
D Front interior lighting
Automatic control
X
Activating: Press button ~.
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on when you
Z
Controls in detail
Rwith
97
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Wipers
98
Runlock
the vehicle
Rremove
the SmartKey from the starter
switch (Interior Lighting Delayed
Shut-off must be switched on
(Y page 135))
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 98
Version: 2.11.8.1
Ropen
a door
Ropen
the tailgate
Interior lighting in the rear
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
The interior lighting goes out after a short
time.
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed
or in starter switch position 0.
X
Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.
Manual control
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
X
Switching front interior lighting on/
off: Press switch c.
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X
X
Wipers
Notes
! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that
accumulates on a windshield/rear window
might scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary
to operate the wipers in dry weather
conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective switch p.
Emergency lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Switching off:
X
Press button ~.
or
X
Press hazard warning flasher switch
(Y page 96).
or
X
Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Switching rear reading lamps on/off:
Press reading lamp : where indicated by
the arrow.
Windshield wipers
X
Observe notes on page (Y page 98).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 99
Version: 2.11.8.1
Wipers
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
X
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wipers off
2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping8
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping9
4 ° Slow continuous wiping
5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the desired
position, depending on the intensity of the
rain.
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
suitable wiping interval depending on the
wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.
8
9
Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor
automatically.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
or
Rthe
wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Single wipe
X
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow B to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with washer fluid
X
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow B past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining.
Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.
Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Z
Controls in detail
Switching on/off
99
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Power windows
100
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 217).
For information on cleaning the headlamps
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 96).
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 100
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rear window wiper/washer
X
Observe notes on page (Y page 98).
The rear window wiper engages automatically
when the automatic transmission is shifted
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
switched on.
Rear window wiper indicator B appears in
the lower multifunction display when the rear
window wiper is activated.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 217).
Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves,
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
For safety reasons, do the following before
attempting to remove any blockage:
RStop
the vehicle in a safe location.
RRemove
the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
or
RTurn
off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in position
0, same as with SmartKey removed from
starter switch).
Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 ô Wiping rear window with washer
fluid
3 I Intermittent wiping
4 0 Rear window wiper off
5 ô Wiping rear window with washer
fluid
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Turn rear window wiper switch : to the
desired position.
REngage
the parking brake.
RRemove
RTurn
blockage.
the wipers on again.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at
all with the combination switch in position
Ä or Å,
Rset
the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speed
Rhave
the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
Power windows
Opening and closing
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door windows
are located on the driver’s door control panel.
The switches for the respective door windows
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 101
Version: 2.11.8.1
Power windows
i Operating the rear door windows from
the rear is not possible when you activate
the override switch (Y page 60).
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
part of your body down between the window
pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch and pull it to close the window.
i You can also open or close the door
windows using the SmartKey, see
“Summer opening feature” (Y page 102)
and “Convenience closing feature”
(Y page 102).
G Warning!
When opening or closing the door windows,
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a door
window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window and open
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the door windows by pressing
and holding button & on the SmartKey or
by pressing and holding the lock button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside
door handle, the automatic reversal function
will not operate.
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
opening.
G Warning!
Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
downward motion of the pane may pull that
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, you can operate the door windows
until you open the driver’s or front
passenger door. If no door was opened you
can operate the door windows for up to
5 minutes.
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
switch : to ? to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window moves
downward or upward until you release the
switch.
X
Express operation: Press or pull
switch : to ? past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding door window opens or
closes completely.
X Stopping during express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again.
Z
Controls in detail
are located on the front passenger door and
on the rear doors.
101
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Power windows
102
Closing when a door window is blocked
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
closing a door window with greater force or
without automatic reversal function.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 102
Version: 2.11.8.1
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly.
X
Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the
door window is fully closed.
The door window closes with greater force.
If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly:
X
Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window
to close without any reversal function for as
long as you hold the switch.
Synchronizing door windows
The door windows must be synchronized after
the battery has been disconnected or if the
door windows cannot be fully closed (express
operation).
Each door window must be synchronized
separately.
X Close all doors.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
(Y page 101) until the respective door
window is closed.
The door window opens again slightly.
X Pull and hold the respective switch once
more immediately until the door window is
closed completely.
X Hold the respective switch for
approximately 1 second.
The door window is synchronized.
Summer opening feature
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by
simultaneously
Ropening
the door windows
Ropening
the tilt/sliding sunroof
Rswitching
on the seat ventilation for the
driver’s seat (Canada only)
The summer opening feature can only be
activated via the remote control of the
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button % on the
SmartKey until the door windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the
desired position.
The vehicle unlocks.
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
interrupt the opening procedure.
Convenience closing feature
When locking the vehicle, you can
simultaneously close the door windows and
the tilt/sliding sunroof.
G Warning!
When closing the door windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 103
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving and parking
of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
RRelease
button & to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold button
%. To continue the closing procedure
after making sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure, press and hold button &.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the lock button on the outside door
handle to stop the closing procedure.
RImmediately
pull on the same outside door
handle and hold firmly. The door windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
With SmartKey
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
the driver’s outside door handle.
X
Driving and parking
Safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button & on the
SmartKey until the door windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof are closed completely.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
interrupt the closing procedure.
G Warning!
With KEYLESS-GO
Starting the engine
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Close all doors.
G Warning!
X
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the
door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
are closed completely.
X Release the lock button on the outside door
handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
103
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Driving and parking
104
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Automatic transmission
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 104
Version: 2.11.8.1
X
Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 79).
Preglow indicator lamp % in the
instrument cluster comes on.
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp %
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 3 and release it.
The engine starts automatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
preglow indicator lamp % may not stay
on and you can start the engine without
preglowing.
With KEYLESS-GO
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
: Button for selecting park position P
j Park position
k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
h Drive position
For more information on how to operate the
gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (Y page 109).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 112).
With SmartKey
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 79) and
release it.
The engine starts automatically.
G Warning!
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
: USA only
; Canada only
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 105
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving and parking
Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter switch
(Y page 80).
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
from the starter switch. Proceed as
described in “With SmartKey”
(Y page 104).
X
Depress the brake pedal during the starting
procedure.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once.
The engine starts automatically.
X
Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once.
The engine preglows and starts
automatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
the time the engine needs to preglow is
reduced.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
X
Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may be
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The engine does not start. You cannot
hear the starter.
The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
X Get a jump start (Y page 336).
If the engine will not start despite a jump
start:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The starter has been exposed to excessive
temperatures.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
attempts can drain the battery.
The engine does not start. You can hear
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
Carry out the following steps:
X
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure.
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESSGO: Close any doors that may be open to
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
or
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
Driving off
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service life
of the engine. This is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ML 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
Z
Controls in detail
X
105
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
106
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 106
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving and parking
is restricted in order to protect it from
damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full
speed when the engine is cold to prevent
premature engine wear and/or diminished
comfort.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
Controls in detail
! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
message Release Parking Brake
appears in the multifunction display when
driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down. However, the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
automatic central locking function engages
and the locking knobs in the doors move
down.
The automatic central locking function can
be switched off (Y page 135).
Automatic transmission
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
X
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows
the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 244).
For information on off-road driving, see “Offroad driving” (Y page 248).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
RGasoline
engine: An ignition cable may be
damaged.
RThe
engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
RGasoline
engine: Unburned gasoline may
have entered the catalytic converter and
damaged it.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 107
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving and parking
X
Give very little gas.
X Have the problem checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
the engine.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
as possible.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 216).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
X
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway.
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be
determined:
X
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Parking
G Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
107
Vehicle movement may result in serious
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep
right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage
the parking brake.
RShift
the automatic transmission into park
position P.
RSlowly
release the brake pedal.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESSGO start/stop button.
RTake
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Parking brake
G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
brake lights do not light up when the parking
brake is engaged.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of park position
P, either of which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 108
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving and parking
108
i Observe instructions if you want the
automatic transmission to remain in
neutral position N, see “Remaining in
neutral position N” (Y page 111).
Controls in detail
With SmartKey
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
X
X
Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning lamp
$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
the instrument cluster goes out.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
pedal ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the brake
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on.
Turning off the engine
G Warning!
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the engine
not running, there is no power assistance for
the brake and steering systems. In this case,
it is important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
i If the engine cannot be turned off as
described, see “Emergency engine
shutdown” (Y page 344).
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Engage the parking brake.
i Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
When you turn off the engine using the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch or open a front door, the
automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
With KEYLESS-GO
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
door opened, the starter switch is set to
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch (Y page 79).
When you turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a
front door, the automatic transmission will
shift into park position P automatically.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 109
Version: 2.11.8.1
Automatic transmission
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i In an emergency you can turn off the
engine while driving by pressing and
holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
for approximately 3 seconds.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
turn it off as described above:
X
Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
The engine turns off. The starter switch is
in position 0 (Y page 79).
Automatic transmission
! Allow the engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature has
been reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces.
This may cause serious damage to the
engine and the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up
more quickly to operating temperature.
Gear selector lever
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 103).
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
109
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
: Button for selecting park position P
j Park position
k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
h Drive position
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
110
Automatic transmission
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! The vehicle must be stopped when you
shift the automatic transmission
between drive position D and
reverse gear R
Rdirectly
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 110
Version: 2.11.8.1
between reverse gear R and
drive position D
Rdirectly
Rdirectly
into park position P
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
(Y page 113).
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
Shifting into park position P
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button : on the gear selector lever.
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch or open a front door,
the automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open a front door, the automatic transmission
will shift into park position P automatically.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P.
i Depending on vehicle production date:
The automatic transmission will shift into
park position P automatically when
Ryou
open the driver’s door while driving
at low speed, and
Rthe
automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
After the vehicle has engaged park position
P automatically, you can engage drive
position D or reverse gear R again to
override this locking feature purposely.
i The gear selector lever always returns to
its original position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 112).
Shifting into neutral position N
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to
the resistance point to select neutral
position N.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic
transmission will shift into neutral position
N automatically.
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
starter switch or opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
transmission into park position P
automatically.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 111
Version: 2.11.8.1
Automatic transmission
Remaining in neutral position N
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
the vehicle through an automatic conveyortype car wash, observe the following
instructions.
G Warning!
When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
switch, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch
on the ignition which could result in
unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could
result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
With SmartKey:
X
Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Shifting into reverse gear R
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up past the
resistance point.
Shifting into drive position D
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever down past the
resistance point.
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
X
With KEYLESS-GO:
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 113)
Rthe
selected program mode:
C/S (ML 63 AMG only) (Y page 114)
or
M (ML 63 AMG only) (Y page 115)
Rthe
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe
vehicle speed
With drive position D selected, you can
influence transmission shifting by
Rlimiting
the gear range
Rextending
Rchanging
the gear range
the gears manually (ML 63 AMG
only)
Z
Controls in detail
transmission into park position P
automatically.
111
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
112
Automatic transmission
Transmission positions
The current transmission position appears in
the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 112
Version: 2.11.8.1
: Transmission position indicator
If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired
position.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D.
X Select automatic program mode C
(ML 63 AMG only).
X Do not limit the gear range.
X Drive off carefully.
Effect
B Park position
Shift the automatic transmission
into park position P only when the
vehicle is stopped. The park position
is not intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked. Rather,
the driver should always engage the
parking brake in addition to shifting
the automatic transmission into
park position P to secure the
vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the automatic
transmission could remain locked in
park position P.
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
C Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 113
Version: 2.11.8.1
Automatic transmission
A Neutral position
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the
transmission, never shift the
automatic transmission into neutral
position N while driving.
Exception: If the ESP® is switched
off or malfunctioning, shift the
automatic transmission into neutral
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in neutral
position N can result in
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
7 Drive position
The automatic transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears are
available.
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X
U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Rocking the vehicle
Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic
transmission directly between drive position
D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
system of this vehicle electronically limits
directly shifting the automatic transmission
between drive position D and reverse gear R
to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
(9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
directly between drive position D and reverse
gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
down past the resistance point.
Working on the vehicle
G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise
the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Towing a trailer
X
When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
gear range manually if the automatic
transmission hunts between gears on
inclines.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
overheat the engine.
For more information on trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” (Y page 254).
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 115).
ML 63 AMG: You only can limit or extend the
gear range when driving in automatic
program mode C or S.
Z
Controls in detail
Effect
113
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
114
Automatic transmission
The current gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 114
Version: 2.11.8.1
: Gear range indicator
C Comfort
For standard driving
(Y page 114)
S Sport
For sporty driving
(Y page 114)
M Manual
For manual gearshifting
(Y page 115)
The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
Effect
= With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
5 Allows the use of the engine’s
braking effect when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin
mountainous regions
Runder
extreme operating
conditions
4 For maximum use of the engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Automatic shift program
The automatic shift program is available on
ML 63 AMG only.
: Program mode indicator
You should only change the program mode
when the automatic transmission is in park
position P.
The last selected automatic program mode
(C or S) is active when the engine is restarted.
X Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction
display.
Selecting program mode C means:
RThe
vehicle starts out more gentle, both
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
RTraction
and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts
occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Program mode selector switch
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 115
Version: 2.11.8.1
Automatic transmission
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the steering wheel gearshift
control.
ML 63 AMG: You only can limit or extend the
gear range when driving in automatic
program mode C or S. For information on
using the steering wheel gearshift control in
manual program mode M, see “Manual shift
program” (Y page 115).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
maximum speed would be exceeded.
Extending gear range
X
Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next higher gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit
X
Steering wheel gearshift control (example
illustration)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral
position N, or reverse gear R.
Limiting gear range
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
X
Briefly pull left gearshift control :.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
the gear range indicator disappears from
the multifunction display.
The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
position D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
X
Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
and deceleration automatically. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Manual shift program
The manual shift program is available on
ML 63 AMG only.
Manual program mode M differs with regard
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
smoothness from automatic program mode
S.
In manual program mode M, systemcontrolled automatic gearshifting is switched
off. You need to change the gears by manually
Z
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting
115
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 116
Version: 2.11.8.1
Automatic transmission
116
Controls in detail
upshifting or downshifting using the steering
wheel gearshift control.
Upshifting
! In manual program mode M, the
automatic transmission will not upshift,
even if the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Shift up into the next
gear before the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Make absolutely certain
that the engine speed does not reach the
red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For standard driving
S Sport
For sporty driving
M Manual
For manual gearshifting
X
Briefly pull right gearshift control ;
(Y page 115).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next higher gear.
Upshift indicator
The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 114).
For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”
(Y page 114) and “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 115).
Activating manual shift program
X
Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until M appears in the
multifunction display.
The automatic transmission switches to
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range is
not limited.
You can change the gears manually with drive
position D selected. You can upshift or
downshift through the gears in succession.
i Manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with
manual program mode M selected, the
automatic transmission will go to
automatic program mode (C or S) when the
engine is restarted.
In manual program mode M, upshift
indicator ; in the multifunction display
advises you to upshift before the engine
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can
drive at the maximum engine speed for each
gear without overrevving the engine.
X Shift the automatic transmission from
current gear : into the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be
interrupted to prevent the engine from
overrevving.
Downshifting
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 117
Version: 2.11.8.1
Instrument cluster
Briefly pull left gearshift control :
(Y page 115).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next lower gear.
i For maximum acceleration, pull and hold
the left gearshift control. Depending on the
engine speed the automatic transmission
selects the optimal gear for maximum
acceleration.
i When you brake or stop, the automatic
transmission shifts down into a gear from
which you can easily accelerate or take off.
Kickdown
Using the kickdown while driving in manual
program mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
X
Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until C or S appears in the
multifunction display.
or
X
Restart the engine.
The automatic transmission will go to
automatic program mode (C or S).
Manual program mode M is not stored.
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less
responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
transmission is most likely operating in limphome (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Turn off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
X Restart the engine.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
R.
X Have the automatic transmission checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Transfer case
This section applies to vehicles equipped with
all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
and rear axles are powered at all times when
the vehicle is being operated.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Instrument cluster
Introduction
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(Y page 28).
Z
Controls in detail
X
117
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
118
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 118
Version: 2.11.8.1
Instrument cluster
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Activating the instrument cluster
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside
Ropen
Rpress
on the ignition
button :, ; or =
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing
button :, ; or = without switching on
the ignition activates the instrument
cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
lamps
Rmalfunction/warning
the driver’s door
Rswitch
temperature
Rwarning/indicator
Rfailure
The instrument cluster is activated when you
messages
of any systems
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
caution. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
Adjusting the instrument cluster
illumination
X
To brighten illumination: Press and hold
button = until the desired level of
illumination is reached.
X To dim illumination: Press and hold
button : until the desired level of
illumination is reached.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the
brightness of the switches in the center
console will also be adjusted when using
button : or =.
Resetting trip odometer
: To dim instrument cluster illumination
; Reset button
= To brighten instrument cluster
illumination
For information on changing the instrument
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
(Y page 130).
X
Make sure you are viewing the standard
display (Y page 122) in the multifunction
display.
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (Y page 117) until the
trip odometer is reset.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 119
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(Y page 29) denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Control system
Introduction
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
The control system relays information to the
multifunction display.
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel.
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 79).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display,
and much more.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
10 Function
119
: Multifunction display
; Press button
~ to end a call
to reject an incoming call
6 to answer a call
to dial10
to redial10
only available in telephone menu.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
120
Control system
Press button
W to select submenus in the
X Settings menu
to set values
to operate the RACETIMER11
to set the volume
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 120
Version: 2.11.8.1
Press button
? to turn Voice Control System
on12, see separate operating
instructions
= Press button
V to select next or previous menu
U
Press button briefly
& to move within a menu
* Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
select a name or number
Press and hold button
& Within Audio/DVD menu to
* select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book
wheel will alter what appears in the
multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction
display is arranged in menus and
accompanying functions and submenus.
The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
information or to customize the settings for
your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
X Press button V or U repeatedly to
pass through each menu one after the
other.
X Press button * or & repeatedly to
pass through each function display, one
after the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 129).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Press button
A to turn Voice Control System
off12, see separate operating
instructions
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
11 AMG
vehicles only.
without Voice Control System: Button without function.
12 Vehicles
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 121
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Multifunction display
121
= Transmission position/gear range
indicator
? Automatic transmission program mode
For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 121).
: Trip odometer
; Main odometer
Menus and submenus
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the multifunction display.
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
13 AMG
14 AMG
Function
:
Standard display menu
(Y page 122)
;
AMG14 menu (Y page 123)
=
Off-road Mode14 menu
(Y page 125)
vehicles only.
vehicles only.
Z
Controls in detail
indicator13
A Outside temperature or digital
speedometer
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
122
Function
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 122
Version: 2.11.8.1
The following functions are available:
RRestarting
the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 223) (Canada only)
?
Audio/DVD menu (Y page 126)
A
Navigation menu (Y page 127)
RChecking
B
AIRMATIC/Compass menu
(Y page 127)
RChecking
C
Distronic menu (Y page 128)
D
Vehicle status message
memory15 menu (Y page 128)
E
Settings menu (Y page 129)
F
Vehicle configuration menu
(Y page 137)
G
Trip computer menu (Y page 138)
H
Telephone menu (Y page 139)
Standard display menu
Standard display
In the standard display, trip odometer : and
main odometer ; appear in the
multifunction display.
X If you see another display, press button
V or U repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
X
tire inflation pressure with the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223) (USA only)
coolant temperature
(Y page 122)
RCalling
up digital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 123)
RCalling
up maintenance service indicator
display (Y page 259)
Checking coolant temperature
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X
Press button & or * repeatedly until
the coolant temperature appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button & or * to select the
functions in the Standard display menu.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stopand-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
15 The
vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 123
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Calling up digital speedometer or
outside temperature
AMG menu
This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
You can select whether the digital
speedometer or the outside temperature
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 131).
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
X
Press button & or * repeatedly until
the digital speedometer or the outside
temperature appears in the multifunction
display.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows you
the gear currently engaged : as well as the
engine oil temperature ;.
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80†. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next
to gear indicator : as a reminder to upshift.
Use buttons & or * to select the
following functions in the AMG menu:
RVehicle
supply voltage (Y page 123)
RRACETIMER (Y
ROverall
RLap
Digital speedometer
page 124)
analysis (Y page 125)
analysis (Y page 125)
Vehicle supply voltage
X
Outside temperature
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & repeatedly until the
vehicle supply voltage appears in the
multifunction display.
Z
Controls in detail
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
123
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
124
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 124
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Controls in detail
X
: Vehicle supply voltage indicator
RACETIMER
G Warning!
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver
is and must always remain responsible for
following posted speed limits.
Starting: Press button W.
X Displaying intermediate time: Press
button X while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button W.
When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 79) or, in
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
when you press button W after switching
the ignition back on or restarting the engine.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
driving stretches.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction
display.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
You can save up to nine laps.
X Press button X while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be saved
as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
the intermediate time is called up.
: RACETIMER
: RACETIMER
; Lap number
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 79).
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
W or X.
; Best lap time
= Lap number
Resetting current lap
X Press button W while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 125
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction
display.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.
Overall analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & repeatedly until the
overall analysis appears in the
multifunction display.
: Lap number
; Lap time
= Maximum speed during lap
? Lap length
A Average speed during lap
X
Press button & or * to see other lap
analyses.
Off-road Mode menu
This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
Use this function to switch the off-road
driving program (Y page 155) On or Off.
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER
; Overall driving time
= Maximum speed
? Overall distance driven
A Average speed
Lap analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Z
Controls in detail
Deleting all laps
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMER
will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps
are deleted.
X Press button W while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
X Press the reset button in the instrument
cluster twice (Y page 118).
X Press button W.
The timer starts. The saved laps are
deleted.
125
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
126
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 126
Version: 2.11.8.1
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Off-road Mode menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
off-road driving program On or Off.
The symbol Ç appears in the lower
multifunction display.
The setting is stored when you turn off the
engine.
For more information on HD Radio with
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to a satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the currently tuned station appears in the
multifunction display.
Example illustration
: Wave band setting and stored memory
position
Audio/DVD menu
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu
operate the audio or video equipment which
you have currently switched on.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting
radio station (Y page 126)
ROperating
audio devices/audio media
(Y page 127)
ROperating
video DVD (Y page 127)
If no audio equipment is currently switched
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the
multifunction display.
Selecting radio station
The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is
treated as a radio application.
; Station frequency
X
Selecting next or previous stored
station: Press button * or & briefly
to select a stored station.
X Selecting next or previous station in the
station list: Press and hold button * or
& to select a station.
X Selecting next or previous station in
wave band (Only if no station list is
available): Press and hold button * or
& to select a station.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 127
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
X
Switch on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Example illustration
: Disc number
; Current track
X
Selecting next or previous track: Press
button * or & briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold button
* or &.
The current track does not appear during
Audio AUX mode operation.
Operating video DVD
X
Switch on the COMAND system and select
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button * or & to select a
scene.
Navigation menu
The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the
multifunction display.
RWith
the COMAND system switched on
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
name of the street currently traveled on
appear in the multifunction display.
RWith
the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver
instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
Please refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
AIRMATIC/Compass menu
The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
messages for air suspension and the
direction into which you are currently driving.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
one of the following messages appears in
the multifunction display.
: Disc number
; Current scene
Z
Controls in detail
Operating audio devices/audio media
127
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
128
Control system
Vehicles with steel suspension:
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 128
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicles with air suspension or ML 63 AMG:
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages.
G Warning!
For information on air suspension, see “Air
suspension program” (Y page 155).
For information on the compass, see
“Compass” (Y page 207).
Distronic menu
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Vehicle status message memory
menu appears in the multifunction display.
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Press button & or *.
The stored messages will now be displayed
in the order in which they have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages,
see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (Y page 272).
Use the Distronic menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated or deactivated.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
of this manual (Y page 144) for instructions
on how to activate Distronic.
Vehicle status message memory
menu
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the memory.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if messages have been stored.
i After you have scrolled through all
recorded status messages, the first
recorded message appears again.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 129
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction
display when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or removed
from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,
the number of messages will reappear when
you turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
driver’s door.
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings
Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
when engine is running.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function To reset, press
reset button for 3 seconds, with which
you can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings and a collection of submenus
with which you can make individual settings
for your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 129)
in the Settings menu
(Y page 130)
X
Press the reset button in the instrument
cluster (Y page 117) for approximately
3 seconds.
The request to press the reset button once
more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
RSubmenus
RInstrument
cluster submenu
(Y page 130)
RTime/Date
RLighting
RVehicle
submenu (Y page 132)
submenu (Y page 133)
submenu (Y page 135)
RComfort
X
Press the reset button once more.
The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by
pressing the reset button a second time. After
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
menu reappears in the multifunction display.
submenu (Y page 135)
Resetting to factory settings
You can reset the settings of all submenus to
the factory settings.
For safety reasons, the function Lamp
Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting
submenu cannot be reset while driving.
Z
129
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
130
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 130
Version: 2.11.8.1
Submenus in the Settings menu
RSelecting
X
RSelecting
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
The collection of the submenus appears in
the multifunction display. There are more
submenus than can be displayed
simultaneously.
language (Y page 131)
display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 131)
Time/Date submenu
RSetting the time (Y page 132)
RSetting
the date (Y page 132)
Lighting submenu
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 133)
RSwitching
locator lighting on or off
(Y page 133)
RSwitching
X
Press button X.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up
with button W.
X With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button & to access the
individual functions within that submenu.
X Once within the submenu, use button
& to move to the next function or button
* to move to the previous function
within that submenu.
X Use button W or X to change the
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster submenu
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
mode (Y page 131) (Canada only)
RSelecting
digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 131)
night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
off (Y page 134)
RSwitching
interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 135)
Vehicle submenu
RSwitching automatic central locking on or
off (Y page 135)
Comfort submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 136)
RActivating/deactivating
seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 136)
RSwitching
fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors on or off (Y page 137)
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the Instrument Cluster submenu
via the Settings menu. Use the
Instrument Cluster submenu to change
the instrument cluster display settings.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting
speedometer/odometer display
mode (Y page 131) (Canada only)
RSelecting
digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 131)
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 131
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Speedometer appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
language (Y page 131)
RSelecting
display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 131)
Selecting speedometer/odometer
display mode (Canada only)
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Display Unit
Speedometer/Odometer appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
X
Press button W or X to set digital
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
Selecting language
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Language appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button W or X to set
speedometer/odometer unit to Km or
Miles.
Selecting digital speedometer display
mode
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Display Unit Digital
X
Press button W or X to select the
language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Selecting display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
Z
Controls in detail
RSelecting
131
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
132
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 132
Version: 2.11.8.1
Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Status Line Display
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to select the
desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator (lower
display).
The other display now appears in the
Standard display menu (Y page 122).
Time/Date submenu
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date display
settings.
The following functions are available:
RSetting
the time (Y page 132)
RSetting
the date (Y page 132)
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND
system and navigation module, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions for
information on how to set the time and date.
Setting the time
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Clock Set Hour or Clock
Set Minute(s) appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Example illustration for setting the hour
X
Press button W or X to set the hours
or minute(s).
Setting the date
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Date Set Month, Date Set
Day, or Date Set Year appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 133
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Example illustration for setting the month
X
Press button W or X to set the
month, day, or year.
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
RSwitching
daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 133)
RSwitching
locator lighting on or off
(Y page 133)
RSwitching
night security illumination on or
off (Y page 134)
RSwitching
interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 135)
Switching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only)
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Daytime Running Lamps
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
daytime running lamp mode On or Off.
With daytime running lamp mode switched on
and the exterior lamp switch in
position $ or Ã, the low-beam
headlamps are switched on when the engine
is running.
In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally:
RParking
RTail
lamps
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
For more information on the daytime running
lamp mode, see (Y page 94).
For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not
possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings can only be made with
engine off.
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
driving (Y page 129) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
Switching locator lighting on or off
With the locator lighting feature activated, the
exterior lamp switch in position à and the
interior lighting in automatic mode, the
following lamps will come on during darkness
when the vehicle is unlocked using button
% on the SmartKey:
RParking lamps
RTail
lamps
Z
133
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
134
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
RFront
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 134
Version: 2.11.8.1
fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will go out automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Surround Lighting
Function appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position à before the engine is turned off,
the following lamps will come on when the
engine is turned off:
RParking
RTail
lamps
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
RFront
fog lamps
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door,
the lamps will automatically go out after
60 seconds.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Headlamp Delayed Shutoff appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
locator lighting function On or Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
à when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Switching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on
or off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and closing all doors.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
à before turning off the engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
activated.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 135
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
X
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to position
0.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
you start the engine.
Switching interior lighting delayed shutoff on or off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Vehicle submenu
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
to set the automatic central locking.
Switching automatic central locking on or
off
Use this function to switch the automatic
central locking on or off. With the automatic
central locking activated, the vehicle is
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Vehicle submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Automatic Door Locking
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
automatic central locking On or Off.
Comfort submenu
Access the Comfort submenu via the
Settings menu.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
Z
Controls in detail
You can temporarily deactivate the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
135
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 136
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
136
The following functions are available:
RActivating
easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 136)
RActivating/deactivating
the seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 136)
Controls in detail
RSwitching
fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors on or off (Y page 137)
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 87).
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress
one of the memory position buttons.
RPress
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Easy-entry Function
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to activate (On)
or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit
feature.
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment feature
Use this feature to set the seat belts to be
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or
front passenger seat belt fastened and the
starter switch in position 2.
For more information on the seat belt
adjustment feature, see (Y page 51).
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Belt Adjustment appears in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to active (On) or
deactivate (Off) the seat belt adjustment
feature.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 137
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
Distance warning function
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
determine whether the distance warning
function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
function set to On, the system will alert you
when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path
and the danger of a collision exists, even
when the Distronic is switched off.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the vehicle configuration menu appears
in the multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Distance Warning appears
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button W or X to switch the
distance warning function On or Off.
: Symbol for activated distance warning
X
Press button W or X to switch the
function On or Off.
Vehicle configuration menu
Use the Vehicle configuration menu to
activate/deactivate the Distance warning
function (Y page 137) or to set the DSR
speed (Y page 138).
function
If the distance warning function is switched
on you will see the symbol Ä in the
Standard display. When the distance warning
function is switched off the symbol Ä will
not appear.
Z
Controls in detail
Switching fold-in function for exterior
rear view mirrors on or off
Use this function to set the exterior rear view
mirrors to be folded in automatically when
you lock your vehicle.
With this function set to On and the exterior
rear view mirrors folded in using the button
on the door control panel (Y page 91), the
exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out
when you switch on the ignition. You will then
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
using the button on the door control panel
(Y page 91).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Fold In Mirrors When
Locking appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
137
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
138
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 138
Version: 2.11.8.1
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
programmed default speed
RResetting
Use this function to program the default
speed the DSR is set to when it is activated.
You can program the default speed between
3 - 10 mph (Canada: 4- 18 km/h). The set
value is increased in 1 mph (Canada:
2 km/h) increments.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Vehicle configuration menu appears
in the multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message DSR Speed appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
RDistance
fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 139)
RCurrent
to empty (Y page 139)
fuel consumption (Y page 139)
When you enter the Trip computer menu,
you will always see the fuel consumption
statistics since start first.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
X
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
: Distance driven since start
; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
X
Press button W or X repeatedly until
the desired speed is shown in the
multifunction display.
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the
programmed default speed to regulate the
vehicle’s speed.
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the
set speed using the cruise control lever
(Y page 154).
Trip computer menu
Use the Trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
RFuel
consumption statistics since start
(Y page 138)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 138)
? Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
X
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message From Reset appears in the
multifunction display.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 139
Version: 2.11.8.1
Control system
: Distance driven since last reset
; Time elapsed since last reset
Current fuel consumption
= Average speed since last reset
X
? Average fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
X
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the reading that you want to reset appears
in the multifunction display.
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Distance to empty
X
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Range: appears in the
multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
instead of the remaining driving range.
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Consumption appears in the
multifunction display.
The current fuel consumption appears in
the multifunction display.
Telephone menu
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
You can connect your telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see
Z
139
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Control system
140
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 140
Version: 2.11.8.1
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
RNo Service: No network is available.
RBluetooth
Ready: The telephone has
not been connected to the COMAND
system via Bluetooth® yet.
X Connect the telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
Dialing a number from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
If you press and hold button & or
* for longer than 1 second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
The stored names are displayed in
alphabetical order.
RReady
or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the
multifunction display you will then see the
following message, or if available, the caller
ID (number or name):
X
Press button 6.
You have answered the call.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
call
X
Press button ~.
: Selected name from the phone book
X
Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X
Press button ~ if you do not want to
make the call.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 141
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Redialing
Driving systems
Introduction
This section describes the following driving
systems of your vehicle:
control
RDistronic
RDistance
warning function (only available
with Distronic)
RHill-start
assist system
RDownhill
Speed Regulation (DSR)
ROff-road
driving program
RAir
suspension program (Adaptive
Damping System (ADS) and vehicle level
control)
RAll-wheel
drive (4MATIC)
RParktronic
RRear
system
The cruise control maintains the speed you
set for your vehicle automatically.
The use of the cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
The currently set speed or last set speed
(“Resume” function) appears in the status
indicator of the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
RCanada
only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
i The cruise control should not be activated
during off-road driving.
G Warning!
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
RThe
use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
spin and loss of control.
RDeactivate
the cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
view camera
The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, EBP,
ESP® and 4-ETS are described in the “Safety
and security” section (Y page 61).
Z
Controls in detail
Cruise control
The control system stores the most recently
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone
book.
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button 6.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the desired number or name appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
RCruise
141
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
142
Driving systems
G Warning!
When the cruise control is braking, the brake
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
must not be impeded by any obstacles:
RDo
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 142
Version: 2.11.8.1
not place any objects in the footwell.
RMake
sure that the floormats and carpets
are securely in place.
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
You could otherwise cause an accident and
injure yourself and/or others.
The vehicle speed displayed in the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting for the cruise control system.
Setting current speed
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow : or press in direction
of arrow ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise control
: Setting current or higher speed
X
; Setting current or lower speed
or
= Canceling the cruise control
X
Depress the brake pedal.
Rwhen
you brake
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow =.
The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
The cruise control switches off automatically
and an acoustic warning will sound when
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
Rthe
? Activating the cruise control or resuming
to last set speed
Activating cruise control
You can activate the cruise control at a
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
You cannot activate the cruise control
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
due to a malfunction
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Rthe
ESP® is in operation
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
Rthe
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 143
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed.
Changing the set speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
You can increase or decrease the set speed
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down to the
resistance point.
X
Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up to the resistance point in direction
of arrow :.
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down to the resistance point
in direction of arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.
X
Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up past the resistance point in
direction of arrow :.
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
Setting stored speed (Resume
function)
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
Z
Controls in detail
ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rthe
143
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Driving systems
144
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 144
Version: 2.11.8.1
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow ?.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
Distronic
Safety notes
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise
control increases the driving convenience
afforded by the cruise control while traveling
on expressways and other major roadways.
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you
follow that vehicle at your preset following
distance.
RIf
there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
the Distronic will function in the same way
as standard cruise control (Y page 141).
G Warning!
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly
recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
G Warning!
When the Distronic is braking, the brake pedal
is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically).
The pedals’ range of motion must not be
impeded by any obstacles:
RDo
not place any objects in the footwell.
RMake
sure that the floormats and carpets
are securely in place.
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
You could otherwise cause an accident and
injure yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
speed adjustment reduction capability is
intended to make cruise control more
effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.
It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
replace the need for extreme care.
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
stopping distance, always remains with the
driver.
The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account. Complex driving
situations are not always fully recognized by
the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
missing distance warnings.
G Warning!
The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
substitute for active driving involvement. It
does not react to pedestrians or on stationary
objects, nor does it recognize or predict the
lane curvature or the movement of preceding
vehicles.
The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
maximum braking power of the vehicle.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
provide the steering, braking and other driving
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 145
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
conditions into account. Only use the
Distronic if the road, weather and traffic
conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.
G Warning!
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
The Distronic does not function in adverse
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do
not switch it on if:
Rroads
are slippery or covered with snow or
ice. The wheels could lose traction while
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle
could skid.
Rthe
Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain
or fog, for example. The distance control
system functionality could be impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the Distronic is
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able
to recognize dangerous situations until it is
too late. This could cause an accident in which
you and/or others could be injured.
G Warning!
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic conditions
is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not the Distronic is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Distronic will not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
vehicles.
Switch off the Distronic:
Rwhen
changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
the left lane
Rwhen
entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
Rin
complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, the Distronic will continue
to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
The Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set
distance from moving objects in front of it.
i This device has been approved by the FCC
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Z
Controls in detail
inputs necessary to remain in control of the
vehicle.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
Distronic system to malfunction.
145
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
146
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 146
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp · goes out
when the necessary distance to the vehicle
ahead is established again.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
cruise control speed segments come on
around set speed :.
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting on the Distronic system.
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
When the Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the cruise control speed
segments ; appear in the speedometer.
These segments represent the difference
between the set speed of your vehicle : and
the speed of the preceding vehicle =.
If the Distronic calculates that there is a
danger of collision, the distance warning lamp
· in the instrument cluster comes on and
an intermittent warning sounds.
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
collision.
Under no circumstances should the driver
await the intermittent warning sound
before braking.
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to approximately 20% of the
maximum deceleration of your vehicle.
You must also apply the brakes yourself to
avoid a collision. The Distronic brakes the
vehicle in an effort to restore the preset
distance or to maintain the set speed. The
brake pedal is automatically applied as this
happens which results in the brake pedal
moving
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 147
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
147
Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system and/or the distance warning function
are activated or deactivated.
i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
system, see (Y page 147) or see
(Y page 149).
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 137).
X
Press button V or U repeatedly until
one of the following two displays appears
in the multifunction display.
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed ; appears in the status indicator
of the multifunction display:
DTR XXX Miles
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means of
the cruise control lever.
Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard Distronic display in the
multifunction display.
: Setting current or higher speed
; Setting current or lower speed
: Preceding vehicle, if detected
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle
= Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle
? Your vehicle
Distronic activated
When the Distronic is activated :, you will
see the set speed ; in the multifunction
display for approximately 5 seconds. The
following display appears in the multifunction
display.
= Deactivating the Distronic
? Activating the Distronic or resuming to
the last set speed
Activating Distronic
You can activate the Distronic when the
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
cruise control speed segments around the set
speed in the speedometer dial are
illuminated. The multifunction display will
show a message such as
DISTRONIC 55 MPH
(Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).
Z
Controls in detail
Distronic menu in the control system
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Driving systems
148
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles
RCanada
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 148
Version: 2.11.8.1
only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h
If the Distronic is not activated after the
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
arrow ? (Y page 147), you will see the
message DISTRONIC Off in the
multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate the
Distronic:
Rup
to 2 minutes after starting the engine
Rwhen
you brake
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction
Rwhen
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting on the Distronic system.
Setting the current speed
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow : or depress in
direction of arrow ; (Y page 147).
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator pedal and continue to
accelerate past the set speed, the following
message will appear in the multifunction
display:
DISTRONIC Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only by the
accelerator pedal position.
Changing the set speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
You can increase or decrease the set speed
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down to the
resistance point.
X
Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up to the resistance point in direction
of arrow : (Y page 147).
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down to the resistance point
in direction of arrow ; (Y page 147).
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 149
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
X
Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : (Y page 147).
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;
(Y page 147).
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
Setting stored speed (Resume function)
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow ? (Y page 147).
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Deactivating Distronic
X
Depress the brake pedal.
or
X
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow = (Y page 147).
The cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out and the
following message appears briefly in the
multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
The Distronic switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
149
engage the parking brake. In this case, the
cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out.
The Distronic also switches off automatically
when
Rthe
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Rthe
ESP® is in operation
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
Rthe
ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rthe
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving
The cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
warning will sound. Observe additional
messages in the multifunction display that
may appear.
G Warning!
Distronic switches off and releases the brakes
when the vehicle decelerates below the
minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by
operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic
will resume the last set speed.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance
for Distronic by varying the time setting
between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
Distronic calculates and sets the required
following distance to the preceding vehicle.
The set distance will be shown in the
multifunction display.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 150
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
150
G Warning!
Controls in detail
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving
recommendations for safe following distance.
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
RWhile
in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
previously selected speed.
The Distronic regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra
disabled vehicle
Ran
X
X
Increasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch : in direction of arrow =.
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Decreasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;.
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
to brake in such situations. Braking will
deactivate the Distronic system.
G Warning!
The Distronic works to maintain the speed
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).
oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means of
steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning!
The Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
cover (located in the hood grille), especially
at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,
and the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
sensor cover, see (Y page 263).
i If the message DISTRONIC Available
Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
slush) has dissolved; the Distronic works
again, if you reactivate it (Y page 147).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 151
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Turns and bends
151
The Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
In turns or bends, the Distronic may not
detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
Offset driving
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by the Distronic.
There will be insufficient distance to the
preceding vehicles.
Distance warning function
This function warns you at a vehicle speed of
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) in
the following cases:
RAt the current speed, the distance between
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from
your direct line of travel may not be detected
by the Distronic. There will be insufficient
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Lane changing
your vehicle and the preceding vehicle is
too low for several seconds. The distance
warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster comes on.
RYou
are gaining on a preceding vehicle
rapidly. An intermittent warning sounds
and the distance warning lamp · in the
instrument cluster comes on.
If these warnings are issued, you must apply
the brakes to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp · will also go out.
Z
Controls in detail
Narrow vehicles
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Driving systems
152
G Warning!
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 152
Version: 2.11.8.1
If the distance warning lamp · in the
instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
function. This could result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
X
Activating/deactivating: Activate or
deactivate the distance warning function in
the control system (Y page 137).
When activated, the distance warning
function indicator Ä appears in the
multifunction display.
Hill-start assist system
G Warning!
The hill-start assist system is not designed to
function as a parking brake. It does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked
on an incline.
Always engage the parking brake in addition
to shifting the automatic transmission into
park position P.
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system
for approximately 1 second after you have
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The hill-start assist system is inactive
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
grades
Rwith
the automatic transmission in neutral
position N
Rwith
the parking brake engaged
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rif
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
For information on off-road driving, see “Offroad driving” (Y page 248).
The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. The
DSR regulates your vehicle’s speed when
driving downhill to the value set in the control
system (Y page 138). The steeper the
downhill gradient is, the greater the brake
application. On flat road surfaces, the DSR
brakes only slightly or not at all.
G Warning!
The Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is a
convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The system
must be set to be appropriate for the
topographical and weather conditions
encountered which can change quickly. The
driver is and must remain at all times
responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe
brake operation.
Depending on the programmed speed, actual
vehicle speed and gradient, switching on the
DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to
slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound
which is caused by the activation of the
vehicle’s brake system through the DSR.
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others. Do not switch on the DSR in
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 153
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
a circumstance where rapid deceleration
could result in a loss of vehicle control.
153
Switching the DSR on/off
The DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in
automatic transmission positions D, or R.
braking effect by shifting the automatic
transmission into a lower gear.
You can drive slower or faster than the set
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or
depressing the accelerator pedal.
i Whenever the DSR is switched on, the
DSR will use the programmed default
speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed. The
default speed programmed at the factory is
4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed
can be reprogrammed using the control
system (Y page 138). The next time the
DSR is switched on, the DSR will use the
newly programmed default speed to
regulate the vehicle’s speed.
Once the DSR is switched on, you can
adjust the set speed using the cruise
control lever (Y page 142). Keep in mind
that adjusting the set speed using the
cruise control lever with the DSR switched
on will not change the programmed default
speed. If the DSR is switched off and then
switched on again, the DSR will use the
programmed default speed.
Depending on the road surface and level of
downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to
maintain the set speed. To maintain the set
speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
G Warning!
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is activated,
the vehicle can drive faster than the
programmed set speed. You should therefore
drive downhill with particular caution as it
could otherwise lead to an accident and/or
serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind
that as soon as you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on,
the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s
speed including use of brakes if required.
Depending on the programmed set speed,
actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR
can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others.
Switching on the DSR
The DSR can only be switched on if the vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
X Press DSR switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
The message DSR and the set speed appear
in the multifunction display.
Z
Controls in detail
i In addition, make use of the engine’s
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
154
Driving systems
i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above
20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message
DSR Max. Speed 20 MPH (Canada:
30 km/h) appears in the multifunction
display.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 154
Version: 2.11.8.1
For information on how to program the set
speed while driving, see “Adjusting the DSR
speed” (Y page 154).
Switching off the DSR
X Press DSR switch :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The message DSR Off appears in the
multifunction display.
i At a speed above approximately 21 mph
(Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR
is automatically switched off. The message
DSR Off appears in the multifunction
display and an acoustic signal sounds. For
information on how to switch the DSR on
again, see “Switching on the DSR”
(Y page 153).
Adjusting the DSR speed
With the DSR switched on (Y page 153), the
speed setting can be changed using the
cruise control lever.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set value is increased or decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each
time you lift or depress the cruise control
lever to the resistance point.
Increase set speed:
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the
resistance point in direction of arrow :.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Reduce set speed:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
to the resistance point in direction of
arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
the DSR will use the programmed default
speed (Y page 138).
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
i The set value is increased or decreased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each
time you lift or depress the cruise control
lever past the resistance point.
Increase set speed:
X
Cruise control lever
You can change the set speed between
3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).
You can increase or reduce the set speed in
two ways.
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of
arrow :.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 155
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
155
Reduce set speed:
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the new set speed.
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
the DSR will use the programmed default
speed (Y page 138).
Example illustration: All models, except
ML 63 AMG
i In AMG vehicles you can switch the Offroad driving program on or off via the
control system (Y page 125).
X
Switching on: Press switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The symbol
Ç appears in the lower multifunction
display.
X
Switching off: Press switch : again.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The symbol
Ç disappears.
Off-road driving program
The off-road driving program is designed to
assist the driver when driving off-road in
terrain and crossing water. The off-road
driving program adjusts the engine power and
shifting of the automatic transmission to be
more suitable for the off-road use of the
vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and 4-ETS
designed for off-road use are automatically
activated.
In the following situations you should switch
to the off-road driving program:
Rduring
Rwhen
off-road driving
crossing water (Y page 251)
Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients
Air suspension program
The system lets you select the chassis and
suspension setup. The chassis and
suspension setup adjusts the damping
behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
The system consists of two components. The
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
(Y page 156) and the vehicle level control
(Y page 156).
Z
Controls in detail
X
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
156
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 156
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Controls in detail
ML 63 AMG
The air suspension program is part of the ML
63 AMG standard equipment range.
Due to the vehicle’s sportier suspension
tuning, in comparison with standard vehicles,
the level positions in the ADS settings as well
as the speed thresholds for raising and
lowering the vehicle have been modified.
From the highway/high-speed level, the
vehicle is lowered to the ADS SPORT level
approximately 20 seconds after it is locked.
From the raised level, the vehicle is not
lowered after it is locked. When the engine is
started, the previously selected setting, e.g.
ADS COMF, is selected again.
The following settings are available:
RAUTO
(for normal driving situations)
Indicator lamps ; and = are off.
RSPORT
(for sporty driving)
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).
ML63 AMG:
With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
lowered approximately 0.3 in (8 mm).
! Be sure to observe this vehicle’s differing
values for ground clearance and vehicle
height in comparison to standard vehicles.
You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
Observe the values for
Ropening the tailgate
Rdriving
off-road
RCOMF
(for comfort driving)
Indicator lamp = comes on.
ML63 AMG:
The vehicle is raised approximately 0.28 in
(7 mm).
Rthe
vehicle’s main dimensions in the
“Technical data” section
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is
controlled electronically and operates
continuously. It adjusts the damping
characteristics to the current operating and
driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
individually for each wheel. Driving safety and
tire comfort are increased.
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
on:
Ryour
driving style
Rroad
surface conditions
Ryour
personal settings
X
Start the engine.
Press ADS switch : repeatedly until the
desired suspension tuning is reached.
The setting remains stored when you turn off
the engine.
X
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to increase vehicle safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.
Changes to the vehicle level should be made
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will
then reach the set level as fast as possible.
When you park the vehicle and the ambient
temperature changes, the vehicle level may
change visibly. When the temperature drops,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 157
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
the vehicle lowers. When the temperature
rises, the vehicle raises.
The vehicle automatically regulates its ride
height based on the set vehicle height and the
current speed:
RAs your driving speed increases, the vehicle
is lowered by increments until it reaches
highspeed level.
RVehicles
with ADS: If you are driving with
the ADS setting COMF or AUTO, the
vehicle is raised back to highway level as
your driving speed decreases.
RVehicles
with ADS: You can select the
highspeed level via the ADS setting
SPORT. In ADS SPORT, the vehicle is
lowered directly to highspeed level as your
driving speed increases.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle
unlocked.
In order to operate the vehicle level control
switch (Y page 157), however, the engine
must be running.
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle.
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven
terrain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower
level may cause the vehicle underbody to
come in contact with the ground and result
in damage to the vehicle underbody.
Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient
ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
! Before jacking up the vehicle with
equipment that lifts one or more of the
wheels completely off of the ground,
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
For information on off-road driving, see “Offroad driving” (Y page 248).
G Warning!
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could
become wedged into or under the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed.
Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate
is opened and will continue after the door is
closed again.
G Warning!
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
level is as low as possible. With higher ride
height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
situations.
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
157
Basic settings (except ML 63 AMG)
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
be selected using vehicle level control
switch : in the center console:
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Controls in detail
158
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 158
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Level
Driving situation
Level
Driving situation
Raised level
For off-road driving or
driving in rough terrain.
Indicator lamp ; is on.
Raised level
For off-road driving or
driving in rough terrain.
Indicator lamp ; is on.
Highway
level
For driving on paved roads
in fair or better condition.
Indicator lamp ; is off.
Highway
level
For driving on paved roads
in fair or better condition.
Indicator lamp ; is off.
i The third available level is the highspeed
i The third available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
The following is the approximate change in
ride height for each of the level settings:
level that is set automatically.
Level
Ride height
Raised level
+2.3 in (60 mm)
How much the vehicle is lowered or raised
depends on the ADS setting selected. At the
raised level, the vehicle is 2.9 in (73 mm)
higher than at the highway level with ADS
AUTO.
Highway
level16
+/-0 in (0 mm)
Raised level
Highspeed
level
-0.6 in (-15 mm)
i Vehicles with ADS:
Depending on the ADS setting
(Y page 156), the vehicle will be lowered to
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
i The highspeed level is not available when
towing a trailer. For more information on
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing”
(Y page 254).
Basic settings (ML 63 AMG)
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
be selected using vehicle level control
switch : in the center console:
16 Ground
clearance: 7.9 in (201 mm)
Only select the raised level if appropriate for
the driving situation encountered. Otherwise
the fuel consumption may increase and/or
the handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable.
i You can select the raised level at speeds
up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds,
the message Á Level Selection
Not Permitted appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Start the engine.
When indicator lamp ; is off:
X
Press vehicle level control switch :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 159
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
i The message can be cleared by pressing
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the V, U, & or * button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
the V, U, & or * button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp ; comes on continuously and the
following message appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds:
Highway level
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
may cause the vehicle underbody to come
in contact with the road and result in
damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.
X
Start the engine.
When indicator lamp ; is on:
X
When the highway level is reached, indicator
lamp ; goes out and the following message
appears in the multifunction display for
approximately 5 seconds:
The vehicle is lowered to the highway level
automatically if the vehicle speed is above
55 mph (88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed
stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph
(88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC),
both axles are powered at all times when the
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC
improves traction in conjunction with the
ESP® (Y page 63) and the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 64).
Press vehicle level control switch :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the highway level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
Z
159
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
160
Driving systems
G Warning!
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
traction:
RWhile
driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
RWhile
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 160
Version: 2.11.8.1
driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt
your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
could damage the transfer case, which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
The Parktronic system is activated
automatically when
Ryou
switch on the ignition
and
Ryou
release the parking brake
and
Rthe
automatic transmission is in drive
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
lower speeds, the Parktronic system
activates again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates when
you shift the automatic transmission into
park position P or engage the parking brake.
The Parktronic system monitors the
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (Y page 242) or
snow chains as required.
Parktronic system
The Parktronic system is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed
to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
The Parktronic system indicates the relative
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle
visually and audibly.
To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 263).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other critical maneuvers always
remains with the driver.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 161
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
161
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle.
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
Controls in detail
! Special attention must be paid to objects
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
in this range, all the distance warning
segments illuminate and you hear a warning
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the
minimum distance, the actual distance may
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic
system.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
162
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 162
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
Controls in detail
RFront
area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into park
position P or the parking brake is engaged.
RRear
area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into drive
position D, or park position P, or the
parking brake is engaged.
Front area warning indicators
Switching the Parktronic system on/
off
Rear area warning indicators
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
Parktronic system is ready to measure when
the yellow readiness indicators = are
illuminated.
The current transmission position determines
which warning indicator will be activated.
Current
transmission
position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or
more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
The Parktronic system switches on
automatically when the ignition is switched
on.
Example illustration: All models, except ML 450
HYBRID
X
Switching off: Press Parktronic
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :
again.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 163
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving systems
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
deactivated when you have established the
electrical connection between your vehicle
and the trailer you are about to tow.
! The distance between the sensors in the
bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as
the minimum range of the Parktronic. A
trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an
obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any
damage.
Parktronic system malfunction
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system, if only the red distance segments
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
The Parktronic system will switch off
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
X
Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 263).
X Switch on the ignition.
or
X Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image,
like in the rear view mirror.
In addition, the rear view camera contains
guidelines to help you with driving in reverse.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
G Warning!
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles
Rfrom
a distorted perspective
Rinaccurately
Rmay
not display obstacles at all
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
camera may not show objects which are
Rvery
close to the rear bumper
Runder
the rear bumper
Rabove
the tailgate handle
You are responsible for safety at all times and
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit
is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
Rit
is night or you are parking/maneuvering
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
light
Rear view camera
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
Z
Controls in detail
Trailer towing
163
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164
Driving systems
Rthe
immediate surroundings are
illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker)
Rthere
is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
the cold (lens condensation)
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 164
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rthe
camera lens is dirty or covered
Rthe
rear of your vehicle is damaged
In this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a MercedesBenz Center for this purpose.
Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property
including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
G Warning!
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
you are color-blind or have impaired color
vision.
Only use rear view camera if you can see and
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
rear view camera on the COMAND system
display.
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens”
(Y page 263).
Switching on/off
X
Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the COMAND system.
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
gear R.
The COMAND system display will show the
area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
X
G Warning!
Please note that objects which do not touch
the ground may appear to be further away
than they actually are, for example:
Rthe
Ra
bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
trailer hitch
Rthe
back of a truck
In such cases, you should not use the
guidelines to judge the distance. You may
misjudge the distance which increases the
risk of impacting the objects.
Even when the object you approach is directly
on the ground do not approach the object any
closer than the red guideline.
Red guideline = indicates an approximate
distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
indicate the approximate width required for
the vehicle.
i The image from the rear view camera will
no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 165
Version: 2.11.8.1
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
image again, disengage and reengage
reverse gear R.
X
165
Switching off: Shift the automatic
transmission into park position P, neutral
position N, or drive position D.
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Climate control (Y page 167)
Controls in detail
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
3-zone automatic climate control
USA only (Y page 173)
Canada only (Y page 175)
The climate control combines an automatic
heating and ventilation system with a cooling
system. You can adjust the automatic
climate control separately for the driver’s
and passenger side.
The 3-zone automatic climate control
combines an automatic heating and
ventilation system with a cooling system.
You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
166
Rear automatic climate
control (Y page 177)
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 166
Version: 2.11.8.1
Center air vents
: Left center air vent, adjustable
The rear automatic climate control allows
separate climate settings for the rear
compartment.
Air vents
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climate
control:
X
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
; Right center air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
and ? in the required direction.
Side air vents
Example illustration driver’s side
: Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = in
the required direction.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 167
Version: 2.11.8.1
Climate control
When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.
Controls in detail
Rear center console air vents
: Left rear center air vent, adjustable
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Rear climate control panel
Climate control
Control panel
Function
167
Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s
side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 170)
; Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic
(22†).
mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.
(Y page 170)
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
168
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 168
Version: 2.11.8.1
Climate control
Function
= Front defroster
Recommendation/Notes
i Keep this setting selected
Controls in detail
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
(Y page 171)
? Increasing air volume
(Y page 171)
A Air distribution (directs air
through the windshield and side
air vents)
(Y page 171)
B AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation
(Y page 169)
i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 172)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 170)
side
(22†).
D ± Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(USA only)
^ Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(Canada only)
E Air distribution (directs air
through center and side air
vents)
(Y page 171)
F Air distribution (directs air
through the footwells and side
air vents)
(Y page 171)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume
(Y page 171)
I Rear window defroster
(Y page 183)
J Air recirculation
i Only use this function for a
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
(Y page 172)
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 169
Version: 2.11.8.1
Climate control
Function
169
Recommendation/Notes
K Interior temperature sensor
i Switches on the climate
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
opening feature” (Y page 102). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much faster.
Notes on climate control
The climate control is operational whenever
the engine is running. You can operate the
climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the
selected interior temperature and the current
outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(Y page 169).
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
(Y page 169)
Deactivating the climate control
system
G Warning!
When the climate control system is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
X
Deactivating: Press button ^.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
i You can also press button ^ on the
climate control panel.
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the
climate control system, the defrosting
mode is activated.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front
X
Deactivating: Press button ±.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
Z
Controls in detail
L Climate control on/off
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
170
Climate control
the temperature set by the operator. In
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 170
Version: 2.11.8.1
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air
conditioning. The interior air will then no
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
X Press button Á.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
X Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic mode
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
X
Set the desired temperature
(Y page 170).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
i The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
X
Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The automatic operation of air volume
switches off. The selected blower speed is
shown in air volume display G
(Y page 167).
or
X
Press air distribution button ¯, P, or
O.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The automatic operation of air distribution
switches off.
Setting the temperature
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 171
Version: 2.11.8.1
Climate control
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Adjusting air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Symbol
Function
¯
Directs air to the windshield and
side air vents
P
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
O
Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
X
X
Press button ¦.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
following functions automatically:
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside
temperature
Rair
flows onto the windshield and the
front door windows (side air vents must
be open)
Rthe
Press the desired air distribution button
¯, P, or O.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the
desired button.
Adjusting air volume
X
Activating
Decreasing/increasing: Press button
I or K.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in air
volume display G (Y page 167).
When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
the Voice Control System is not used
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
previously selected level.
air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for airdrying
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
X Press button I to decrease or button
K to increase air volume to the desired
level.
The air volume decreases/increases to the
next lower/higher blower speed and
heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
Z
Controls in detail
in small increments, preferably starting at
72‡ (22†).
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control : and/or C
(Y page 167) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
171
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Climate control
172
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on.
or
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 172
Version: 2.11.8.1
Turn temperature control : and/or C
(Y page 167) slightly in any direction.
Heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on.
i The air conditioning compressor remains
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press button
¦.
X
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
temperatures.
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically.
on even if the indicator lamp in button
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the
windshield from fogging.
Deactivating
X
Press button ¦ again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
i To deactivate, you can also press button
^ or Ã.
Windshield fogged on the outside
X
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 98).
X
Press air distribution button P or O.
Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
Rafter
5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below approximately
41‡ (5†)
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying are turned off
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment.
Rafter
30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately
41‡ (5†)
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 173
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery.
The residual heat is deactivated automatically
Rwhen
Rafter
the ignition is switched on
approximately 30 minutes
Rif
the battery voltage drops
Rif
the coolant temperature is too low
Controls in detail
i How long the system will provide heating
173
X
Activating: Switch off the ignition.
Press button Á.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
X
3-zone automatic climate control
Control panels
USA only
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
174
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 174
Version: 2.11.8.1
Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s
side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)
; Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic
= Front defroster
i Keep this setting selected
(22†).
mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
(Y page 179)
(Y page 181)
? Increasing air volume
(Y page 181)
A Air distribution (directs air
through the windshield and side
air vents)
(Y page 180)
B AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation
(Y page 178)
i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 183)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)
side
(22†).
D Operating the rear climate
control from the front
(Y page 178)
E Air distribution (directs air
through center and side air
vents)
(Y page 180)
F Air distribution (directs air
through the footwells and side
air vents)
(Y page 180)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume
(Y page 181)
I Rear window defroster
(Y page 183)
J Air recirculation
i Only use this function for a
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
(Y page 182)
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 175
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
175
Recommendation/Notes
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off
i Switches on the climate
(Y page 178)
Controls in detail
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
Canada only
Function
Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s
side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)
; Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic
(22†).
mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.
(Y page 180)
= Air distribution, driver’s side
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
? Front defroster
(Y page 179)
i Keep this setting selected
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
(Y page 181)
A Increasing air volume
(Y page 181)
B Rear window defroster
(Y page 183)
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
176
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 176
Version: 2.11.8.1
Recommendation/Notes
C Air distribution, passenger side
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
(Y page 180)
D Operating the rear climate
control from the front
(Y page 178)
E Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)
side
(22†).
F Automatic climate control on/
off
i Switches on the climate
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
(Y page 178)
G Air distribution, passenger side
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
(Y page 180)
H Air distribution, passenger side
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
(Y page 180)
I AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat ventilation
(Y page 178)
i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 183)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
J Display
(Y page 181)
K Decreasing air volume
L Air recirculation
i Only use this function for a
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
(Y page 182)
M Air distribution, driver’s side
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
(Y page 180)
N Air distribution, driver’s side
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
(Y page 180)
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 177
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
177
Recommendation/Notes
O Interior temperature sensor
Rear automatic climate control
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
: Increasing air volume
; Temperature control
= Air distribution and air volume (automatic
mode)
? Air distribution (directs air through the
side air vents)
A Air distribution (directs air through the
footwells and side air vents)
B Rear automatic climate control on/off
C Decreasing air volume
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate
control
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic
climate control determines the relation of the
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual
zone.
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside
temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the automatic climate
control in either the automatic or manual
mode.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(Y page 178).
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 102). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much faster.
Z
Controls in detail
(Y page 183)
P Adopting driver’s side settings
for all zones
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 178
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
178
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display
is cleared and the indicator lamp in button
X goes out after approximately
3 seconds.
The rear climate control switches on.
Deactivating the climate control
system
Controls in detail
G Warning!
When the climate control system is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
Deactivating the front climate control
X
Deactivating: Press button ^.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Canada only: Display J (Y page 175) is
cleared.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
i You can also press button ^ on the
climate control panel.
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the
climate control system, the defrosting
mode is activated.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front
USA only
X
Deactivating: Press button ±.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Canada only
X
Deactivating: Press button X.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
In display J (Y page 175), you will see the
Y symbol followed by MODE for
approximately 3 seconds.
X Within these 3 seconds press button
^.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol
followed by OFF.
The rear climate control is switched off.
X Reactivating: Press button X.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the rear
X
Deactivating: Press button ^.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
the temperature set by the operator. In
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the cooling
function of the climate control system. The
interior air will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
X Press button Á.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 179
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
X Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic mode
You can switch the climate control system on
and off for each zone of the passenger
compartment as desired.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
X
Set the desired temperature
(Y page 179).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
i The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The automatic air volume is switched off
and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
remains switched on.
or
X Press an air distribution button Z17,
M17, \17, P, ¯18, c17 or
O.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
remains switched on.
Automatic mode with rear climate
control panel
X
Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The temperature, air volume and air
distribution are adjusted automatically.
X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The automatic air volume is switched off
and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
remains switched on.
or
X Press button M or P.
The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
remains switched on.
Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
lower the temperature setting in small
17 Canada
18 USA
only
only
Z
Controls in detail
Activating
179
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
180
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 180
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
increments, preferably starting at 72‡
(22†).
Rear temperature with rear climate
control panel
Controls in detail
X
Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control ; (Y page 177)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air distribution
USA only
Front temperature with front climate
control panel
USA only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control : and/or C
(Y page 173) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Canada only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control : and/or E
(Y page 175) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Rear temperature with front climate
control panel
USA only
X Press button ±.
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control C (Y page 173)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Canada only
X Press button X.
In display J (Y page 175) you will see the
Y symbol.
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control E (Y page 175)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Symbol
Function
¯
Directs air to the windshield and
side air vents
P
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
O
Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
X
Press the desired air distribution button
¯, P, or O.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Canada only
The air distribution can be adjusted
separately on each side of the passenger
compartment.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 181
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
Symbol
Function
Passenger
side
Z
M
\
c
X
P
O
Directs air to
the windshield
and side air
vents
Directs air
through the
center, side
and rear
passenger
compartment
air vents
Directs air to
the footwells
and side air
vents
Press the desired air distribution button
Z, \, or c for the driver’s side,
or M, P, or O for the passenger
side.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
the Voice Control System is not used
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
previously selected level.
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Activating
X
Press button ¦.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
following functions automatically:
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside
temperature
Rair
flows onto the windshield and the
front door windows (side air vents must
be open)
Rthe
Adjusting air volume
USA only
X
Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in air
volume display G (Y page 173).
Canada only
X
Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed appears in display
J (Y page 175).
air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for airdrying
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
X Press button I to decrease or button
K to increase air volume to the desired
level.
The air volume decreases/increases to the
next lower/higher blower speed and
heating switches to the temperature that
Z
Controls in detail
Symbol
Driver’s
side
181
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 182
Version: 2.11.8.1
3-zone automatic climate control
182
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on.
or
Controls in detail
X
Turn temperature control : and/or C
(USA only) (Y page 173) or : and/or E
(Canada only) (Y page 175) slightly in any
direction.
Heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on.
i The air conditioning compressor remains
on even if the indicator lamp in button
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the
windshield from fogging.
Deactivating
X
Press button ¦ once more.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
X
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment.
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press button
¦.
X
automatically at high outside
temperatures.
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically.
^ or Ã.
Windshield fogged on the outside
X
19 Canada
only
Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
i To deactivate, you can also press button
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 98).
X Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:
Press buttons O/c19 and P/
\19.
X
Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 183
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rear window defroster
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
Rafter
5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below approximately
41‡ (5†)
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying are turned off
Rafter
30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately
41‡ (5†)
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†)
the system will not automatically switch back
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
added after approximately 30 minutes.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery.
X
Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X Press button Á.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The residual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rwhen
Rafter
the ignition is switched on
approximately 30 minutes
Rif
the battery voltage drops
Rif
the coolant temperature is too low
183
Using driver-side settings for all
temperature zones
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles.
You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
such as temperature, air volume and air
distribution, for all temperature zones. These
settings only need to be made once and the
climate control system will automatically
regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
volume and air distribution.
X Press button ¸.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The driver-side settings are used for all
temperature zones.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
side or the rear passenger compartment
when the MONO setting is active, the
MONO setting will be switched off.
Rear window defroster
G Warning!
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery drain
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is switched off automatically after
some time of operation depending on the
outside temperature.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
184
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Press button ª on the
respective climate control panel.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 184
Version: 2.11.8.1
Switching off: Press button ª again.
The rear window defroster switches off when
the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
lamp in button ª flashes. Too many
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
needed if required.
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing
procedure.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held.
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof
is blocked” section for details.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
any direction.
G Warning!
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
entire body parts or portions of them may
protrude from the passenger compartment.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Please keep in mind that weather
conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 102) and
“Convenience closing feature”
(Y page 102).
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
passenger door. If no door was opened you
can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 185
Version: 2.11.8.1
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
185
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,
Raising
X
Sunroof switch
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can
slide the sunroof screen forward and back.
Raising manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow :.
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sunroof must be closed first.
Sunroof screen
X
Switch on the ignition.
Opening
X
Opening manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow ;.
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express opening is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/
sliding sunroof must be closed first.
Closing
X
Closing manually: Pull and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =.
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow = and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
Z
Controls in detail
resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Loading and storing
186
closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater
force or without automatic reversal function.
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will
stop and open slightly.
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 186
Version: 2.11.8.1
X
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
has stopped and opened because it was
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
sunroof is fully closed.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater
force.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and
opens slightly:
X
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
closed.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without
automatic reversal function.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
after it had been blocked two times will cause
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any
reversal function for as long as you hold the
sunroof switch.
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
Rafter
the battery has been disconnected or
discharged
Rafter
a malfunction
Rif
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
or synchronized, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
X
Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
ignition and open the driver’s door. This
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch. The driver’s door then can
be closed again.
X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
from the fuse box (Y page 342).
X
Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow : (Y page 185) until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow : for approximately
1 second.
X Check the express operation feature
(Y page 185).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
X
Loading and storing
Loading instructions
G Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
cargo higher than the seat backrests.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 187
Version: 2.11.8.1
Loading and storing
The cargo compartment is the preferred place
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo
net when transporting cargo.
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Load distribution
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
towards the front of the vehicle.
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 189) should only be used
for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways
place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe
heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including:
Rfuel
Rtools
Rspare
wheel
Rinstalled
accessories
Rpassengers
Rluggage/cargo
It must never exceed the load limit and the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are
specified on the placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227).
In addition, the load must be distributed so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
your vehicle are indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 227).
For more information, see “Tire and Loading
Information” (Y page 227).
187
For additional safety when transporting cargo
while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten
the outer seat belts crosswise into the
opposite side buckles.
Carriers
For information about further carriers,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
188
Loading and storing
G Warning!
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 188
Version: 2.11.8.1
Only use carriers when the basic carrier bars
have been completely mounted. The left and
right roof rails are only stabilized by means of
the basic carrier bars mounted.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached carrier or its load could become
detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof is
loaded, the handling characteristics are
different from those when operating the
vehicle without the roof loaded.
G Warning!
Parcel nets are intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
footwell and on each of the front seat
backrests.
Make sure
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof at the
rear completely
Ryou
can open the tailgate completely
Cargo tie-down rings
Your vehicle is equipped with six cargo tiedown rings.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 186).
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
: Roof rails
Parcel nets
G Warning!
Vehicles with Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Do not place objects with a combined weight
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net
on the back of the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant weight
category.
Cargo tie down rings, cargo compartment
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 189
Version: 2.11.8.1
Loading and storing
189
G Warning!
Cargo tie down rings, second-row footwell
Hooks
Four hooks are located on the rear
compartment trim panels, two on each side.
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Folding rear seat backrest forward
! Always release the seat cushion and fold
it up before folding the seat backrest
forward. The seat backrest may otherwise
be damaged.
When the seat backrest is folded forward,
the front seats may not be moved to the
rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
Expanding cargo volume
You can separately fold the left and right rear
seat backrests to expand the cargo volume.
G Warning!
X
Pull release loop :.
X Fold seat cushion ; forward.
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
Z
Controls in detail
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 190
Version: 2.11.8.1
Loading and storing
190
Controls in detail
X
Fold seat backrest : rearward until it
engages.
Red indicator A should no longer be
visible.
X Fold seat cushion ; rearward until it locks
into position.
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on seat backrest :.
G Warning!
X
Lower the rear seat head restraints
completely (Y page 84).
X Pull release handle =.
A red indicator A will be visible and seat
backrest ? is released.
If a red indicator is visible with the seat
backrest up, then the seat backrest is not
properly locked into position.
Always lock seat backrest in its upright
position when the rear seats are occupied, or
the extended cargo compartment is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
X
Adjust the rear seat head restraints, if
necessary (Y page 83).
Cargo compartment cover blind
The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the rear seats.
X
Fold seat backrest ? forward.
Returning rear seat backrest to original
position
! Make sure that the seat belt is not
pinched when folding rear seat backrest.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed, do not pile luggage higher than
the lower edges of the rear side windows.
X
Rolling out: Pull cargo compartment cover
blind on handle : across the cargo
compartment.
X Guide cargo compartment cover blind into
mounts ; and release.
X
Rolling up: Disengage cargo compartment
cover blind and guide retraction by its
handle :.
Before removing or installing cargo
compartment cover blind behind the rear
seats, fold the left or right rear seat forward
(Y page 189). Afterwards, return the left or
right rear seat into its original position.
X
Removing: Roll up cargo compartment
cover blind.
X Push release button =.
X Pull cargo compartment cover blind ? to
the left.
X Remove cargo compartment cover blind.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 191
Version: 2.11.8.1
Loading and storing
191
Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged
at top and bottom position and the tightening
belts are securely fastened.
Never use a damaged cargo net.
Always use cargo net when transporting
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from
smaller objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or
sudden maneuver.
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Cargo net
G Warning!
Use of the cargo net is a particularly
important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects. For your
safety, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
The cargo net can be installed behind the
B-pillar or the C-pillar.
X
Installing: Make sure release button =
faces up and handle : is to the rear before
inserting the cargo compartment cover
blind.
X Place left side of cargo compartment cover
blind in left mount.
X Position right side of cargo compartment
cover blind over right mount.
X Press release button = and guide cargo
compartment cover blind into mount.
X Make sure cargo compartment cover blind
is securely fastened.
RWith
the cargo volume expanded
(Y page 189), use holders : behind
B-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings in the
second-row footwell (Y page 189).
RWithout
the cargo volume expanded, use
holders ; behind C-pillars and the cargo
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Loading and storing
192
tie-down rings in the cargo compartment
(Y page 188).
X
Open the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
X Roll out the cargo net.
X Unfold the cargo net.
X Engage the upper cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
Hook belt hook : into cargo tie-down
ring ; in direction of arrow.
X Pull tightening belt = by the loose end in
direction of arrow until the cargo net is
pulled tight.
X After driving a short distance, make sure
the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary,
pull it tight again.
Installing the cargo net
Loosening the cargo net
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 192
Version: 2.11.8.1
Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar
X
Hang cargo net bar ; on holder : as
indicated by the arrow.
X Push cargo net bar ; forward into
holder : in direction of arrow.
X Engage lower cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
Pulling the cargo net tight
Belt hook attached behind the rear seat backrests
X
Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
buckle : upward in direction of arrow.
X Remove belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
ring =.
Removing and storing the cargo net
X
Take cargo net bar ; (Y page 192) out of
holder : (Y page 192).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar.
X Fold the cargo net.
X Roll up the cargo net.
X Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
Front storage compartments
Belt hook attached behind the rear seat backrests
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 193
Version: 2.11.8.1
Loading and storing
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
If so equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo. The cargo net cannot
secure hard or heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle
Ran
maneuvers
accident
1 Glove box unlocked
2 Glove box locked
Storage compartment in front center
console
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface is located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
mode or on media interface, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
X
Press the front of the cover briefly.
The cover opens automatically.
Front armrest storage compartment
X
Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.
X
Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.
You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key.
i The Roadside Assistance button º
(Y page 201) and the Information button
Z
193
Controls in detail
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Useful features
194
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 194
Version: 2.11.8.1
E (Y page 202) are located in the
storage compartment.
Useful features
Opening storage compartment: Pull
button : and lift up armrest.
G Warning!
Coin holders = are located in front of storage
compartment ;.
Rear storage compartments
Depending on vehicle equipment, your
vehicle may not be equipped with three
storage compartments in the front of the rear
seats.
Cup holders
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Cup holder in front center console
A cup holder and a removable card/ticket
holder are located in the front center console.
The cup holder can be removed for cleaning
purposes.
: Storage compartment
; Storage compartment cover
= Release button
? Storage compartment
X
Briefly press release button = on storage
compartment cover ;.
The storage compartment opens
automatically.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 195
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
195
X
Controls in detail
Removing: Hold cup holder at its
bridge ; and pull out bridge in direction of
arrow.
X Pull cup holder : out in direction of arrow.
X Reinstalling: First, insert cup holder :
and then insert bridge ;.
Cup holder in rear armrest
X
Fold down the rear armrest.
: Sun visor
; Additional sun visor
= Vanity mirror lamp
? Vanity mirror cover
A Holder, e.g. for gas cards
B Vanity mirror
C Mounting
Glare through the windshield
X
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Flip sun visor : down when you
experience glare.
Glare through a door window
X
Sun visors
G Warning!
Close vanity mirror cover ? if opened.
Disengage sun visor : from mounting C.
X Pivot sun visor : to the side.
X
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
X
Adjust sun visor : by pushing or pulling in
direction of arrows.
X Flip down additional sun visor ; when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 196
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
196
Vanity mirror
Vanity mirror lamp = only functions when
sun visor : is engaged in mounting C.
X
Controls in detail
X
Flip sun visor down.
Lift up vanity mirror cover ?.
Vanity mirror lamp = comes on.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
i A storage compartment is located under
the ashtray insert.
! The storage compartment is not heatproof. Therefore, do not stub cigarettes in
the storage compartment.
X
Opening: Press cover ; briefly.
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert : on the sides and pull it out
upwards.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
ashtray insert :.
X Closing: Push cover ;.
Cigarette lighter
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
X
Opening: Press cover ; briefly.
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert : on the sides and pull it out
upwards.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
ashtray insert :.
X Closing: Push cover ;.
Rear center console ashtray
! Close the ashtray when not in use and
before folding the rear seats. Otherwise
you could damage the ashtray.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
X Open the ashtray (Y page 196).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 197
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
197
minimum level, the power outlets are
automatically switched off, to help
preserve engine starting power.
12V Power outlets
make sure that the maximum current
drawn does not exceed 55 A.
! The power outlets in the front passenger
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Push in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out
automatically when hot.
X Take out cigarette lighter :.
X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket
after use.
footwell and cargo compartment are not
designed for use with the electric air pump.
Use the power outlet in the second-row
footwell for electric air pump operation.
The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. mobile phone chargers, auxiliary lamps)
up to a maximum of 20 A (240 W).
! The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting, or using
plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may not function
properly any longer.
Front passenger footwell
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for
use with the electric air pump. Use the
power outlet in the second-row footwell for
electric air pump operation.
Power outlets
i You can use the power outlets even if the
ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
Second-row footwell
Z
Controls in detail
! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Controls in detail
198
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 198
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
Cargo compartment
115V AC Socket
G Warning!
The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage.
Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with
the same caution and prudence that you
exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket
cover in the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
G Warning!
A device that you connect must have a
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug
a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use
a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket.
This could cause serious personal injury to
you and/or others.
G Warning!
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
The 115V AC socket : provides an
alternating current of 115 volts, which
enables you to connect small electrical
devices with a combined received power of
150 W at most. You can connect small
devices such as game consoles, mobile
phone chargers, laptops, etc.
Prerequisites for operation:
RThe
12V power outlets in the second-row
footwell and cargo compartment
(Y page 197) are operational.
RThe
plug of the small device must be
inserted fully into 115V AC socket :.
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within
the permissible voltage range.
RThe
specified wattage of the small device
is identical or lower than the maximum
permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V
AC socket :.
X
Operation: Open cover =.
Insert the plug of the small device into
115V AC socket :.
LED ; comes on.
If LED ; does not come on, refer to the
section on possible nonoperation causes.
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC
socket :.
Do not pull on the cable.
X Close cover =.
Possible nonoperation causes:
X
RThe
on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 199
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
Start the engine.
RThe
temperature of the DC/AC inverter is
temporarily too high.
X Pull the plug of the small device out of
115V AC socket : and plug it in again
after waiting a few minutes.
RSome
small devices have a continuous
power rating of less than 150 W but a very
high switch-on current. Such devices will
not operate. When connecting such a
device, 115V AC socket : will not provide
power.
If LED ; still does not come on, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tele Aid
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press Information
button E to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
only).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
access to account information, remote door
unlock and more.
The Tele Aid system is available if
Rit
has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires a subscription for
monitoring services, connection and
cellular air time
Rvehicle
battery power is available
Rthe
relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Customer Assistance
Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Customer
Assistance Center.
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
RAutomatic
RRoadside
and manual emergency
Assistance
RInformation
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
Aid call do the following:
X
Press button W or X on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system.
Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more
information and a description of all available
features.
System self-test
The system performs a self-test after you
have switched on the ignition.
G Warning!
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if any or all of the following
conditions occur:
Z
Controls in detail
X
199
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
200
Useful features
RThe
indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button º does not come on during the
system self-test.
RThe
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 200
Version: 2.11.8.1
indicator lamp in Information button
E does not come on during the system
self-test.
RThe
indicator lamp in the SOS button,
Roadside Assistance button º, or
Information button E remains
illuminated constantly in red after the
system self-test.
message Tele Aid Inoperative or
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
multifunction display after the system selftest
RThe
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
case of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
as soon as possible.
Emergency calls
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press Information
button E to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
only).
An emergency call is initiated automatically
following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
deployed.
i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
emergency call cannot be canceled.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually (Y page 201).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification number
and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center and the occupants of the
vehicle will be established automatically soon
after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
to determine the nature of the emergency
more precisely, provided they can speak to
an occupant of the vehicle.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
immediately.
G Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Customer Assistance
Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
relevant cellular phone network is not
available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 201
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
X
201
Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense.
Initiating an emergency call manually
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Roadside Assistance button
X
Controls in detail
i The “911” emergency call system is a
Open the front armrest storage
compartment (Y page 193).
X
Briefly press on cover : to open.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the
Customer Assistance Center.
X Close cover : after the emergency call is
concluded.
G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
The Customer Assistance Center will
automatically contact local emergency
officials with the vehicle’s approximate
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
vehicle occupants.
X
Press and hold Roadside Assistance
button : for longer than 2 seconds.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
Call will appear in the multifunction
display and the COMAND system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Useful features
202
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 202
Version: 2.11.8.1
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside
Assistance button : is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Customer Assistance
Center established, then the Tele Aid
system could not initiate a Roadside
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Information button
X
Open the front armrest storage
compartment (Y page 193).
X
Press and hold Information button : for
longer than 2 seconds.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
Information button : will flash while the
call is in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the COMAND
system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your
vehicle, the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 203
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
button : is flashing continuously and
there was no voice connection to the
Customer Assistance Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active,
an emergency call is still possible. In this
case, the emergency call will take priority and
override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic
initiated emergency calls can only be
terminated by a Customer Assistance Center
representative. All other calls can be
terminated by pressing button ~ on the
multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a telephone call
on the COMAND system.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted. The
mobile phone is no longer connected to the
COMAND system. If you must use this
phone, we recommend that you use it only
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
location.
Destination Download to the COMAND
system
i The components and operating principles
of the COMAND system can be found in the
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
Destination Download allows you access to a
database of over 10 million points of interest
(POIs) that can be downloaded to your
vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded,
or can be provided with points of interests
near your location.
Route guidance
You will be prompted to confirm that route
guidance to the entered address is to be
started.
X
Select Yes using button = or ; on
the COMAND system.
X Press button 9 on the COMAND system
to confirm.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance to the
defined address.
i If you select No, you can save the address
to your address book.
i The Destination Download feature is
available if the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Search & Send
“Search & Send” is a navigation destination
address entry service. For more information
on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
You will be asked to provide your password.
X Then return to your vehicle at the time
arranged and pull the tailgate recessed
handle (Y page 75) for a minimum of
Z
Controls in detail
i If the indicator lamp in Information
203
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Useful features
204
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 204
Version: 2.11.8.1
20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the
SOS button is flashing.
The message Connecting Call appears in
the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
(USA only).
i The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Call Connected will appear in the
multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by the
Customer Assistance Center, you must
wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate
recessed handle again.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
X
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X Pass this number on to the Customer
Assistance Center along with your
password.
The Customer Assistance Center will then
attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Customer Assistance Center
will contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control can operate up
to three separately controlled devices
compatible with HomeLink® or some other
systems.
G Warning!
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming the
integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
and possible death.
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
notify the Customer Assistance Center
automatically.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 205
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
Programming the integrated remote
control
X
X
Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
Step 2: If you have previously programmed
a signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
or
X
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter
buttons ; and ? and release them when
indicator lamp : begins to flash after
approximately 20 seconds.
Do not hold the buttons for longer than
30 seconds.
This procedure erases any previous
settings for all three channels and
initializes the memory. If you later wish to
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
and begin directly with step 3.
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
control A of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
from the signal transmitter button (;, =
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
indicator lamp : in view.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button B
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
start flashing after 20 seconds.
X
Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
observe indicator lamp :.
If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the respective signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
and released.
i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped with
the “rolling code” feature.
X
Step 7: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
code devices) with the rolling code feature,
follow these instructions after completing the
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
this text. For your convenience and to
complete the procedure faster, you might
want to have someone assist you.
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
i Exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
button may also be referred to as “learn” or
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual.
X
Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following two steps.
Z
Controls in detail
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the
vehicle equipment.
205
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Useful features
206
X
Controls in detail
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 206
Version: 2.11.8.1
Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button (;,
= or ?).
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
release same signal transmitter button a
second time to complete the training
process.
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
remote control until the frequency signal
has been learned.
Upon successful training, indicator
lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.
X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other
i Upon completion of programming the
integrated remote control, make sure you
retain the hand-held remote control that
came with the garage door opener, gate
operator or other device. You may need it
for use in other vehicles, for future
programming of an integrated remote
control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
respective device in other situations.
rolling code equipped devices) may require
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the same signal transmitter button
a third time to complete the training
process.
X
Step 12: Confirm the garage door
operation by pressing the programmed
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?).
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission which
may not be long enough for the integrated
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
the following:
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
release this button until it has been
successfully trained.
X While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
your hand-held remote control button B
as follows: Press and hold button B for
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
To program a device using a signal
transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
release the button.
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after
20 seconds.
X Without releasing the signal transmitter
button, proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button (;,
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter
continues to send the signal as long as the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 207
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
i Certain types of garage door openers are
incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
difficulties with programming the
integrated remote control, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are erased.
Programming tips
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
If you are having difficulty programming the
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
RCheck
the frequency of hand-held remote
control A (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
control is compatible with radio-frequency
devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
a new battery in hand-held remote
control A. This will increase the likelihood
of the hand-held remote control sending a
stronger and more accurate signal to the
integrated remote control.
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
RPut
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
RWhile
performing step 3, hold hand-held
remote control A at different lengths and
angles from the signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?) you are programming.
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
angle at varying distances.
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
RIf
another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that other
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
batteries are in the hand-held remote
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten
the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
signals.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Compass
X
Calling up the compass: Press button
V or U on the multifunction steering
Z
Controls in detail
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
207
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 208
Version: 2.11.8.1
Useful features
208
wheel repeatedly until the AIRMATIC/
Compass menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The compass displays the direction into
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
X
Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
pins :.
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
retainer pins :.
Controls in detail
Infrared reflecting windshield
i If your vehicle is not equipped with air
suspension program, the multifunction
display will show the compass only.
Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior
through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the
transmission of signals through the glass by
in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic
toll collection devices.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
X
Move the driver’s seat or front passenger
seat as far to the rear as possible.
To allow the use of these devices in the
vehicle, infrared transparent areas : are
placed in the windshield.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 209
Version: 2.11.8.1
209
Vehicle equipment ............................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .......
At the gas station .............................
Engine compartment ........................
Tires and wheels ...............................
Winter driving ...................................
Driving instructions ..........................
Maintenance ......................................
Vehicle care .......................................
210
210
210
212
218
242
244
258
260
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
210
At the gas station
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 210
Version: 2.11.8.1
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied
you will be with its performance later on.
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring
this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive engine
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
in each gear).
RAvoid
accelerating by kickdown.
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
shifting to a lower gear using the gear
selector lever.
gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 113)
only when driving at moderate speeds (for
hill driving).
RSelect
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for ML 63 AMG:
RDuring
the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
(140 km/h).
RDuring
this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
RShift
gears in a timely manner.
C as the preferred shift program
for the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km).
RSelect
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine,
the transfer case, the front differential or the
rear differential have been replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
At the gas station
Refueling
G Warning!
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
and poisonous. They burn violently and can
cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
G Warning!
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
G Warning!
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
necessary safety information and warning for
the operation of your vehicle.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 211
Version: 2.11.8.1
At the gas station
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
with diesel fuel. Never refuel vehicles with
diesel engine with gasoline. Even small
amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the
fuel system and engine. Damage resulting
from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
additives or resulting from mixing gasoline
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
drained completely. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
system drained completely.
! Gasoline engine:
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to
overheat and potentially start a fire.
! Diesel engine:
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel
containers, place a filling filter, a suede
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter.
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system.
! Diesel engine:
The engine is more susceptible to wear and
damage if you use
Rmarine
diesel fuel
Rheating
oil
Radditives
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be
seriously damaged if you use any other
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
211
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm
SULFUR MAXIMUM).
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
special additives is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i Gasoline engine:
Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found.
For more information on gasoline, see
“Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
engine)” (Y page 360), see “Fuel
requirements” (Y page 360), or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i Diesel engine:
Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Information on diesel quality can normally
be found on the fuel pump. Please contact
gas station personnel in case labels on the
pump cannot be found.
For more information on diesel fuels, see
“Fuel requirements” (Y page 360), or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
i Diesel engine:
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
(Y page 331).
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
i In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
flap” (Y page 308).
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 212
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
212
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
X
Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
until it audibly engages.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
Operation
X
Close fuel filler flap :.
Low outside temperatures (diesel
engine)
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
X
Turn off the engine.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
malfunction indicator lamp ! (USA
only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 303).
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch. The driver’s door then can
be closed again.
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
point indicated by the arrow.
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
X
Set fuel filler cap ; on fuel filler flap :.
Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
X
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 356).
Check the following:
REngine
RTire
oil level (Y page 214)
inflation pressure (Y page 221)
RCoolant
level (Y page 216)
RVehicle
lighting (Y page 311)
RWasher
system and headlamp cleaning
system (Y page 217)
RBrake
fluid (Y page 217)
Engine compartment
Hood
G Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 213
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
necessary safety information and warning for
the operation of your vehicle.
Opening
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature display to
determine whether the engine may be
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
department.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
Rwith
the engine running
Rwhile
starting the engine
Rwhen
the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
G Warning!
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
Rwith
the engine running
Rwhile
starting the engine
Rwhen
the ignition is switched on
You could be injured when the hood is open –
even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
X
Pull hood lock release lever :.
The hood is unlocked.
! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
hood could be damaged.
Z
Operation
This could cause the hood to come loose and
injure you and/or others.
213
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 214
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
214
may be inaccurate. Some of theses
readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
Operation
G Warning!
X
Press and hold handle ;.
The hood is unlocked.
X Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow
and then release it.
The hood will be held open at shoulder
height by gas-filled struts automatically.
Closing
G Warning!
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others.
X
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
Radiator
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with
a winter front or bug cover. Otherwise the
readings of the on-board diagnostic system
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
necessary safety information and warning for
the operation of your vehicle.
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For further information contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle must
be parked on level ground and the vehicle
must have been stationary for at least
5 minutes with the engine turned off.
Checking engine oil level
X
Open the hood (Y page 213).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 215
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
215
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 356).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 291).
Example illustration: Gasoline engine
! Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty:
RUsing
Example illustration: Diesel engine
X
Pull out oil dipstick :.
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the
dipstick guide tube.
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :.
engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System.
RChanging
of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System.
RUsing
any oil additives.
i All models (except ML 63 AMG):
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
ML 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X
Example illustration: ML 350 BlueTEC (ML 350,
ML 550 similar)
If necessary, add engine oil.
Z
Operation
Adding engine oil
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 216
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
216
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse
extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
Operation
RDo
not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The
coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
ML 63 AMG
X
Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck.
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RUsing
a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure.
RDo
not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts.
X
Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 356) and
(Y page 359).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
X
Using a rag, slowly open cap ;
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure.
X Continue turning cap ; counterclockwise
and remove it.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 217
Version: 2.11.8.1
Engine compartment
217
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rfor
cold coolant: reaches marking
bar : in coolant expansion tank =
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required.
X Screw cap ; back on and tighten it.
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 358) and
(Y page 362).
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result
in damage to the washer system/fluid
reservoir.
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
system is supplied from the washer fluid
reservoir.
During all seasons, use MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
with water or premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze depending on the ambient
temperature (Y page 364).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap : upwards.
X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
For more information, see “Washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(Y page 358).
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Brake fluid level
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
“Practical hints”.
When checking the brake fluid level, the
vehicle must be parked on level ground.
Z
Operation
X
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
218
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 218
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
Operation
G Warning!
The brake fluid level is correct when it is
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir.
Tires and wheels
Safety notes
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice
concerning tire service and purchase.
G Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the
tires may no longer be correct.
G Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.
Important guidelines
ROnly
use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make.
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
RBreak
in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
RRegularly
check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
inflation pressure loss and damage to the
tire beads.
RIf
the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as required.
RDo
not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 219
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
RWhen
replacing individual tires, you should
mount new tires on the front wheels first
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
around).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire inflation pressure when the tires are
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
the best handling, tread life and riding
comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
for any additional information pertaining to
special driving situations. For more
information, see “Important notes on tire
inflation pressure” (Y page 220).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the following illustration.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific
to your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
the recommended cold tire inflation
Z
219
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
220
Tires and wheels
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
G Warning!
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 220
Version: 2.11.8.1
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
check the tires for punctures from foreign
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the
valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
wheels with collapsible tire refer to
Rthe
yellow label on the spare wheel rim
Rthe
“Technical data” section of this
Operator’s Manual (Y page 356)
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar
Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
tires.
i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
label examples are for illustration purposes
only. Tire inflation pressure data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the following illustrations.
Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
approved, factory equipped tires
When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
pressure that follows applies to that
particular tire size only.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 221
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
221
Underinflated tires can
Rcause
excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely
Rlead
affect fuel economy
to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely
affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for
particular tire sizes
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only
show the rim diameter instead of the entire
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 236).
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can
Radversely
Rcause
affect handling characteristics
uneven tire wear
Rbe
more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely
Rincrease
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures
specific to rim diameter
i When towing a trailer, inflate the tires to
the tire inflation pressure as specified for a
fully loaded vehicle.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
affect ride comfort
stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Safety notes
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Z
Operation
G Warning!
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
222
Tires and wheels
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 222
Version: 2.11.8.1
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold (Y page 219).
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
inflation pressure:
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
gauge and check against the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227). If
necessary, add air to achieve the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
with the tire gauge.
X Install the valve cap.
X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each
wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
system to detect a significant loss of pressure
in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in the
multifunction display.
The tire pressure loss warning system may
function in a restricted manner or with a delay
Rwhen
snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
Rin
the presence of ice and snow
Rwhen
you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
Rwhen
you are driving in a very sporty
manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
G Warning!
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one
or more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard or on the tire inflation
pressure label.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked at least once a month when cold.
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
inflation pressure as specified on
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar
or
Rthe
tire inflation pressure label located on
the inside of the fuel filler flap
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 223
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
for your vehicle can be found on
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard
located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 227)
Rthe
tire inflation pressure label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap
The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
the Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire
inflation pressure according to the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
more than one tire cannot be detected by the
tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure loss warning system is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
system
The tire pressure loss warning system must
be restarted in the following situations:
Rafter
you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
Rafter
you have replaced the wheels or tires
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
X
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the tire inflation pressure label on
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
G Warning!
The tire pressure loss warning system can
only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
set the correct tire inflation pressures for
each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Make sure the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (Y page 122).
X Press button * or & on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Active
Menu: R-Button
X Press the reset button (Y page 118).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
X If you wish to confirm: Press button
W.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the tire
pressure loss warning system checks the
set pressure values for all four tires.
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
case of pressure loss in one or more of the
tires.
Z
Operation
i The recommended tire inflation pressures
223
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
224
Tires and wheels
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the
TPMS system itself:
RIf
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 224
Version: 2.11.8.1
the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
the TPMS.
RIf
the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
G Warning!
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
supplemental tire inflation pressure
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door Bpillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately 1 minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to
malfunction develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 225
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
malfunction using the TPMS telltale
flashing and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has been
corrected.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The current tire
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the
multifunction display after a few minutes of
driving.
i Possible differences between the
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
pressure displayed by the control system
apply to sea level. In high-altitude
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
gauge will be higher than the reading issued
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not
reduce the tire inflation pressure under
such circumstances.
X
Switch on the ignition.
Press button V or U on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 122).
X Press button & or * until the current
inflation pressure for each tire appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Example illustration
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressure displayed after driving
for a few minutes. appears in the
multifunction display.
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long
225
as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be
allocated to the individual wheels, the
message Tire Pressure Monitor Active
appears. Despite this message, the tire
inflation pressure values are monitored
already.
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
of the removed road wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
to malfunction.
i This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Example illustration
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
226
Tires and wheels
The respective tire is indicated by a red
rectangle.
Restarting Advanced TPMS
G Warning!
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
inflation pressure to the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You might lose control over the vehicle.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 226
Version: 2.11.8.1
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
new reference values for each tire.
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the current tire inflation pressures.
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
recommended for the vehicle operating
condition. Tire pressure should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition.
If such information is provided, it can be
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 227) or the supplemental tire
inflation pressure information on the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button V or U on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 122).
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
you see the current inflation pressures for
each tire appear in the display or the
following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes.
X Press the reset button (Y page 117).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
X If you wish to confirm: Press button
W.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s specified
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
pressures are accepted as reference values
and then monitored.
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
i When the wheel positions have been
changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
may be displayed for the wrong position
temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
the inflation pressure will be shown for the
correct position.
Maximum tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 227
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
you about the front and rear axle weight
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
Operation
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 219) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total
weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
It also contains information on the proper
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires
on your vehicle.
(2) The certification label, also found on the
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. The certification label also tells
227
: Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
228
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 228
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information placard
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Operation
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 227).
Steps for determining correct load limit
The Tire and Loading Information placard
showing load limit information : is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227).
X Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced in that statement.
Seating capacity
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
data are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 229
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
229
X
Operation
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 231).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 228).
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
230
Tires and wheels
Step 1 Combined weight limit
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 230
Version: 2.11.8.1
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1 500 lbs
1 500 lbs
1 500 lbs
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
3
1
Step 2 Number of occupants
5
(driver and passengers)
Seating configuration
front: 2
rear: 3
front: 1
rear: 2
front: 1
Occupants weight
Occupant 1:
150 lbs
Occupant 2:
180 lbs
Occupant 3:
160 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Occupant 1:
200 lbs
Occupant 2:
190 lbs
Occupant 3:
150 lbs
Occupant 1:
150 lbs
Combined weight of all
occupants
750 lbs
540 lbs
150 lbs
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1 500 lbs 750 lbs =
750 lbs
1 500 lbs 540 lbs =
960 lbs
1 500 lbs 150 lbs =
1 350 lbs
Step 3 Available cargo/
luggage and trailer
tongue weight (total
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (Y page 231).
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(Y page 231) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 231
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 346).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
allowable weight that can be carried by a
single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
have the loaded vehicle (including driver,
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the load
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is between 8% and 15% of the
trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Maximum tire load
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
The maximum tire load rating : is the
maximum weight the tires are designed to
support.
For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 236).
For information on calculating total and cargo
load capacities, see (Y page 228).
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
replaced. Always observe and follow
applicable temporary use restrictions and
speed limitations indicated on the spare
wheel.
MOExtended system
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Z
231
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
232
Tires and wheels
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the tire pressure loss
warning system (Y page 222) or the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223).
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 232
Version: 2.11.8.1
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires,
you should also equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on driving in case of pressure
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode),
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 330).
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
RDriving
RTire
style
inflation pressure
RDistance
driven
Tire care and maintenance
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
a month. For more information on checking
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 219).
Tire inspection
Every time you check the tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your tires
for the following:
Rexcessive
treadwear (Y page 232)
Rcord
or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber
Rbumps,
bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Tread depth
G Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
recommend that you do not allow your tires
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
(3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six places
on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
considered worn and should be replaced.
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 233
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
recommended minimum tire tread depth for
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
233
regarding tire performance. Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
Z
Operation
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
234
Tires and wheels
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 234
Version: 2.11.8.1
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
G Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
be substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
extreme caution.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(Y page 242) with a minimum tread depth of
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels
for the winter season to ensure normal
balanced handling characteristics. On
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Temperature
G Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Rotating tires
G Warning!
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
tire rotation is not possible.
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
pattern that will maintain the intended
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
(Y page 231).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 235
Version: 2.11.8.1
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 319).
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 233)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 238)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 231)
? Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 226)
A Manufacturer
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
235
Operation
Tires and wheels
B Tire ply material (Y page 239)
C Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (Y page 236)
D Load identification (Y page 238)
E Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(Y page 352).
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
236
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 236
Version: 2.11.8.1
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
= Radial tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load index
B Speed symbol
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
General: Depending on the design standards
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
tire size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation (as
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters.
Aspect ratio
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (Y page 237).
Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
Load index
G Warning!
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
tire failure may be the result which may cause
an accident and/or serious injury to you or
others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part.
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Load index A is a numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire can support.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 237
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Speed symbol
G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Speed symbol B indicates the approved
maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the
tire.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
20 or
Index
Speed rating
ZR...(..Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt
the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
To determine the maximum speed
capability of the tire, the service
description for the tire must be referred to.
The service description is comprised of
load index A and speed symbol B.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service description is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed
capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
is the service description. The letter “Y”
designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RAny
tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
M+S20
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S20
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q
M+Sifor winter tires
Z
Operation
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 231) where the
maximum load associated with the load index
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
For additional information on the load index,
see “Load identification” (Y page 238).
237
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
238
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 238
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Index
Speed rating
Load identification
H M+S20 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S20
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Operation
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
RAll
models except ML 63 AMG:
130 mph (210 km/h)
RML
63 AMG:
155 mph (250 km/h)
RML
63 AMG with increased top speed:
171 mph (275 km/h)
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (Y page 352),
for example when purchasing new tires.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to assist you.
20 or
M+Sifor winter tires
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
In addition to the load index, special load
identification : may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating the
speed symbol B (Y page 236).
RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
RXL
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
RLight
Load: designates a light load tire.
RC,
D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 239
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
239
Tire type code
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such
tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
The date of manufacture A identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3208” represents the 32nd
week of 2008.
Tire ply material
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 218).
Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
under the tread ;.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
Z
Operation
Date of manufacture
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
240
Tires and wheels
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 240
Version: 2.11.8.1
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed
in percentage.
Bar
Metric unit for air pressure. There are
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
loaded on the trailer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
tongue load). It is indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Curb weight
Kilopascal (kPa)
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
air conditioning and additional optional
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa
to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Cold tire inflation pressure
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Load index
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 241
Version: 2.11.8.1
Tires and wheels
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Rim
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit, and production options
weight.
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
Sidewall
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to
special driving situations can be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
of manufacture”.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation (speed symbol);
indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Traction
The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
Z
Operation
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
241
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
242
Winter driving
Tread
Winter tires
The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
G Warning!
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 242
Version: 2.11.8.1
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Maximum permissible weight on trailer
tongue.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
it by two.
Winter driving
General information
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with
a winter front. Otherwise the readings of
the on-board diagnostic system may be
inaccurate. Some of theses readings are
required by law and must be accurate at all
times.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
G Warning!
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
well impair turning stability and that overall
driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
section (Y page 352).
Always observe the speed rating of the winter
tires installed on your vehicle.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 243
Version: 2.11.8.1
Winter driving
After installing winter tires:
X
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust
it if necessary (Y page 221).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 222) or the Advanced Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 223).
243
and state laws before installing snow
chains.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 63)
before setting the vehicle in motion. This
will improve the vehicle’s traction.
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System
(ADS):
When driving with snow chains, do not
select SPORT mode as this may result in
damage to your vehicle.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
make sure the use of snow chains is
permissible as specified in the “Technical
data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
Snow chains should only be driven on snowcovered roads at speeds not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
as possible when driving on roads without
snow.
Observe the following guidelines when using
snow chains:
Winter driving instructions
G Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
not facing the wind.
G Warning!
RUse
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
RUse
G Warning!
of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 352).
snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
RUse
of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check local
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
the automatic transmission to neutral
Z
Operation
Snow chains
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
244
Driving instructions
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 243).
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 244
Version: 2.11.8.1
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the
normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
To save fuel you should:
RKeep
tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.
RRemove
unnecessary loads.
RRemove
carriers when not in use.
RAllow
engine to warm up under low load
use.
RAvoid
frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
RHave
all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance system. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.
Drinking and driving
G Warning!
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Pedals
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Power assistance
G Warning!
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the brake when the engine is not running.
Steering and braking requires significantly
more effort and you could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
in motion.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 245
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
Brakes
Downhill grades
! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces
wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Continuous or hard braking
G Warning!
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Wet roads
G Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water
deep enough to wet brake components, the
first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with
245
considerable force prior to parking. The heat
generated serves to dry the brakes.
Salt-covered roads
G Warning!
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
linings may cause a delay in the braking
effect, resulting in a significantly increased
braking distance, which could lead to an
accident.
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally
brake carefully when you are
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
layer of salt that may have built up on the
brake discs and the brake linings is
removed without putting other road users
at risk
Rmaintain
a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular care
Rcarefully
apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are removed
from the brake disc
Brake service
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released. Observe
additional messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the
reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
246
Driving instructions
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
G Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
braking is substantially impaired. This could
result in an accident.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 246
Version: 2.11.8.1
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
or the vehicle is being towed with one axle
raised.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Such testing should be no longer than 10
seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If your brake system is only subjected to
moderate loads, you should occasionally test
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
above-normal braking pressure at higher
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
brake pads.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (Y page 63).
High-performance brake system
The high-performance brake system is only
available on ML 63 AMG.
G Warning!
New vehicle brake pads and disks, and
replacement brake pads and disks may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that
time, you may need to use increased brake
pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
of this and adjust your driving and braking
accordingly during this break-in period.
Excessive high-demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition
messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high-performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
The high-performance brake system is
designed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to
accommodate the performance capabilities
of the vehicle.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 247
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
noise depending on the
Rvehicle
Rbrake
speed
force applied
Rambient
conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidity
As with any brake system, the wear of
individual brake system components such as
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
driving style and the conditions under which
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
calling for high-demand braking will cause
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
Parking brake
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into
the parking brake.
To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the
braking power of the parking brake, observe
the following:
X
From time to time, lightly engage the
parking brake before driving off.
X Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds
(100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
G Warning!
While performing this procedure please
assure that the vehicle is stopped before
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
light up when the parking brake is engaged.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when you engage the parking brake.
Driving off
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached.
247
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
when conditions indicate possible
hydroplaning:
X Reduce vehicle speed.
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
X Apply brakes cautiously.
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine its
depth.
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
i Vehicles with air suspension program:
Select the raised level (Y page 156) before
driving through standing water.
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
248
Driving instructions
For more information, see “Driving through
water” (Y page 251).
Off-road driving
G Warning!
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 248
Version: 2.11.8.1
Do not load items on the basic carrier bars. It
may cause instability during some maneuvers
which could result in an accident.
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected
obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle
cannot complete the attempted climb, back it
down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so
the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you use
only the service brake. For information on
driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
G Warning!
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional wear
and tear as well as brake failure.
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and
cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full
braking power may not be available in an
emergency.
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program: Please
be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the
center of gravity also rises. Therefore, always
ensure that the vehicle level is as low as
possible. With higher ride height the ESP®
may activate earlier in certain situations.
Read this chapter carefully before you begin
off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle
characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving.
We recommend that you start out with easy
off-road travel.
Special driving features for off-road
driving
The following driving features are available for
specific kind of operation:
ROff-road
ABS (Y page 63)
ROff-road
ESP® (Y page 65)
ROff-road
4-ETS (Y page 64)
RHill-start
assist system (Y page 113)
RDownhill
Speed Regulation (DSR)
(Y page 152)
ROff-road
RAir
driving program (Y page 155)
suspension program (Y page 155)
Off-road driving rules
REngage
the off-road driving program
(Y page 155) before driving under off-road
conditions.
RVehicles
with air suspension program:
Make sure you select a vehicle level
(Y page 156) appropriate to the
topographical conditions. Always make
sure the vehicle has enough ground
clearance.
RFasten
items being carried as securely as
possible (Y page 186).
RAlways
navigate gradients with the engine
on and with the transmission engaged in a
gear. Switch on the DSR (Y page 152) to
help maintain a preset speed.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 249
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
! Observe the following during off-road
driving:
RKeep
doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/
sliding sunroof closed whenever driving
off-road.
RAdjust
vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the speed
should be. Drive through water slowly at
an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
RBe
especially careful when driving in
unknown territory. It may be necessary
to get out of the vehicle and scout the
path you intend to take.
RWatch
out for obstacles, such as rocks,
holes, tree stumps and ruts.
RBefore
driving through water, determine
its depth.
RDo
not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
RIn
sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
allowed by conditions. This helps
overcome the vehicle rolling resistance
and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle
sinking into the ground.
RDo
not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
interrupts the forward momentum of the
vehicle.
RAlways drive onto slopes with the engine
running and the vehicle in gear.
RDo
not shift automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
249
Checklist before off-road driving
Engine oil level
RCheck the engine oil level (Y page 214).
Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle
obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on
steep gradients.
! If the engine oil level warning lamp comes
on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe
location or as soon at is safe to do so.
Check the engine oil level.
The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tires
RCheck the tread depth and maintain
specified tire inflation pressure. A placard
with the recommended tire inflation
pressures is located on the driver’s door Bpillar (Y page 228).
RCheck
tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects.
RReplace
missing valve caps.
Rims
RDented or bent rims can cause tire inflation
pressure loss and damage the tire beads.
For this reason, check and, if necessary,
change rims before driving off-road.
Vehicle tool kit
RCheck if the jack (Y page 270) is
functional.
RAlways
take the vehicle tool kit, a strong
tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put
under the jack on sandy soil) with you.
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
250
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 250
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
Driving in steep terrain
climbing ability of the vehicle depends on
terrain conditions.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 113).
RDrive
slowly.
RAvoid excessive engine speeds – drive with
moderate engine speeds (max. 3 000 rpm).
Operation
RUtilize
the engine’s braking power when
descending a slope, observe the engine
speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply
the service brake as needed.
Slope angle
: Overhang angle, front
i For maximum engine speed, see
; Overhang angle, rear
Vehicles with
steel
suspension
“Tachometer” (Y page 119) and see vehicle
specification for your vehicle
(Y page 348).
:21
;
27°
22°
26°
Vehicles with
air suspension
program
:
:21
;
Never turn the vehicle around on steep
inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the
vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear.
Raised level
31°
25°
29°
i The hill-start assist system supports you
Highway
25°
18°
24°
ML 63 AMG
:
;
when driving uphill.
For more information, see “Hill-start assist
system” (Y page 152).
Raised level
26°
28°
Highway
21°
24°
:
RCheck
the brakes after a lengthy
downgrade drive.
RComply with the warnings (Y page 248) and
rules for off-road driving (Y page 248).
RDriving on embankments, slopes and other
steep inclines should only be done straight
up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity.
Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the
21 Vehicles
with AMG Sport-Package
G Warning!
Traction in steep terrain
The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the climbing
ability of the vehicle depends on terrain
conditions.
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
continuous wheel traction when driving in
steep terrain.
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out
on a steep incline when the front wheels
have then the tendency to slip due to the
weight shifting towards the rear axle.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 251
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
limits the torque for the front wheels by
braking them.
Simultaneously the torque for the rear
wheels is increased.
251
Remember that, when stopped, the front
wheels slide across a surface and thus lose
their ability to steer the vehicle.
Driving through water
Driving across a hilltop
Rlosing
ground contact when cresting hills
Rlosing
its forward momentum
Rspeeding up too much after climbing the hill
Driving downhill
RDrive
slowly.
Operation
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift
automatic transmission into neutral position
N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up
too much after climbing a hill.
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
across the hilltop.
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
prevents the vehicle from:
: Fording depth
Vehicles with steel :
suspension or air
suspension
program (raised
level)
20 in (50 cm)
RDo not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer
into the line of gravity and drive with the
front wheels pointing straight downhill.
Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways
off the path and roll over.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 113).
ROn
steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed
Regulation (Y page 152).
RUtilize
the engine’s braking power to
reduce vehicle speed.
If this is insufficient, apply the brakes
gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in
the line of gravity.
RCheck
the brakes after a lengthy
downgrade drive.
i The special Off-road ABS (Y page 63)
setting allows for precise and brief
(cyclical) blocking of the front wheels,
permitting them to dig into loose ground.
RBefore driving through water, determine its
depth.
! The water depth must not exceed the
respective value listed in the table. The
ground under the water might not be firm
which could result the water being deeper
than expected when driving the vehicle
through it. Please note that the water level
is correspondingly lower for flowing water.
RVehicles
with air suspension program:
Select the highest vehicle level possible
(Y page 156).
RSwitch
to off-road driving program
(Y page 155) before driving through water.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 or 2 (Y page 113).
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
REnter
and leave the water only at a shallow
spot, driving at walking speed.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
252
Driving instructions
! Never accelerate before driving into the
water. The bow wave could force water into
the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
RDrive
through the water slowly and at a
constant speed.
RDo
not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 252
Version: 2.11.8.1
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors
while driving through water. Water could
otherwise enter the vehicle interior and
damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as
the interior equipment.
RThere
is a very high level of driving
resistance in water. The surface is slippery
and may not be firm, making pulling away
in water difficult and dangerous.
RMake
sure that only small bow waves are
formed when driving the vehicle through
water.
RClean
mud off the tire tread after driving
through water.
RTo
dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times while driving
after leaving the water.
Crossing obstacles
adequate ground clearance when you cross
obstacles with your vehicle. The person
assisting you outside the vehicle should
always be a safe distance away from the
vehicle and positioned so that he or she
cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected
vehicle movement.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles,
inspect vehicle for any damage, especially
vehicle underbody and suspension
components. Failure to do so can adversely
affect the vehicle’s future performance,
including increased chance of an accident.
When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and
other obstacles, observe the following rules:
RMake
sure the off-road driving program
(Y page 155) is switched on.
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 113).
RCheck
the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles.
RCross
obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big
rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front
wheels at the center of the obstacle, and
repeat same with the rear wheel.
! Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result
of its possible slanted position which in turn
may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling
over.
Driving on sand
G Warning!
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle
underbody or suspension components. If
possible use the assistance of a second
person outside the vehicle to scout the
path you intend to take and check for
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 253
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
When driving on sand, observe the following
rules:
RVehicles with air suspension program:
Set the raised level (Y page 156).
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
RShift
automatic transmission into a gear
range that is appropriate for the terrain.
RIn
sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
conditions permit. This helps overcome the
vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the
ground.
RDrive
in tracks of other vehicles if they are
not too deep and you have sufficient
clearance.
Ruts
A number of off-road tracks or other byways
have deep ruts which can cause the
underbody to come in contact with the
ground.
RMake sure the off-road driving program
(Y page 155) is switched on.
RVehicles
with air suspension program:
Set the raised level (Y page 156).
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient.
Otherwise:
Ryour
vehicle may be damaged
Rthe
underbody of the vehicle may come
in contact with the ground and you may
get stuck
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 113).
RDrive
next to the ruts rather than through
them if at all possible.
RIf the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with
one side of the vehicle on the grassy center
strip if the route permits.
253
Returning from off-road driving
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
Off-road driving increases strain on the
vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle
for possible damage after each off-road trip.
Recognizing any damage and a subsequent
timely repair reduces the chance of a possible
breakdown or accident later on.
Proceed as follows:
RSwitch
off the off-road driving program
(Y page 155).
RSwitch
off the DSR (Y page 153).
RVehicles
with air suspension program:
Lower the vehicle back to a level suitable
for road conditions, e.g. highway/highspeed level (Y page 156).
RClean
all exterior lamps and check for
possible damage.
RClean
the front and rear license plate.
RRemove
excessive dirt from tires, wheels,
wheel housings, and underbody.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean the
radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and
wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet
of water.
RCheck
tires for possible damage.
RInspect
vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake
hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody
for possible damage.
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
254
Driving instructions
RCheck
Electrical connections
! Brush or branches could increase the
The vehicle is prewired to accept the sevenwire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz
approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
for brush or branches caught in the
underbody.
possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/
or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of
the axles or drive shafts.
RAfter
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 254
Version: 2.11.8.1
continued operation in mud, sand,
water or other dirty conditions clean the
brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check
and clean axle joints.
RConduct
a brake test.
Trailer towing
G Warning!
Failure to use proper equipment and driving
technique can result in a loss of vehicle
control when towing a trailer.
Improper towing or failure to follow the
instructions in this manual can result in
vehicle damage and/or serious personal
injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully
to assure safe trailer operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
should you require an explanation of
information contained in this manual.
Trailer hitch
ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
for your vehicle.
For information on availability and
installation, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RThe
bumpers on your vehicle are not
designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them.
RTo
reduce the possibility of damage,
remove the hitch ball adapter from the
receiver when not in use.
i A four-pole conversion plug is available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as a spare part.
For further information, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight
of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the
trailer. The maximum permissible GTW to be
towed:
RVehicles
with 4MATIC: 7 200 lb (3 265 kg)
RVehicles
without 4MATIC: 4 630 lb
(2 100 kg)
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue:
RVehicles with 4MATIC: 576 lb (261 kg) limit
for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch receiver
RVehicles
without 4MATIC: 370 lb (168 kg)
limit for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch
receiver
Loading a trailer
RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe
that neither the permissible GTW, nor the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are
exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (Y page 227).
Maximum permissible values are listed on
the safety compliance certification labels
for the vehicle and for the trailer to be
towed.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 255
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
RThe tongue weight at the hitch ball must be
added to the rear axle weight to prevent
exceeding the rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is indicated on
the certification label located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227).
Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most states and all Canadian provinces
require
Rsafety
chains between the towing vehicle
and the trailer
The chains should be criss-crossed under
the trailer tongue. They must be attached
to the hitch receiver, and not to the
vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the
trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue
weight between 8 % and 15 % of the GTW.
i The weight of other accessories,
passengers and cargo will reduce the
maximum trailer weight and tongue weight
your vehicle can tow.
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer
are in compliance with the maximum
permissible weight limits, have the loaded
rig (towing vehicle including driver,
passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a commercial scale.
the vehicle’s front and rear gross
axle weight, the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and tongue weight.
The values as measured must not exceed
the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and
trailer weights and ratings” (Y page 254).
Ra
separate brake system at various trailer
weights
Ra
break-away switch on trailers with a
separate brake system.
Check with your local state laws for specific
requirements.
The switch activates the trailer brakes in
the possible event that the trailer might
separate from the tow vehicle.
! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
trailer is so equipped) directly to the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your
vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the
trailer’s brakes will function properly.
RCheck
Coupling a trailer
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program: While
you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make
sure nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/
or opens or closes doors or the tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
switch or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
i The provided vehicle electrical wiring
harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (Y page 110).
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
(Y page 107).
X Start the engine (Y page 103).
X Vehicles with vehicle level control:
Select the highway level (Y page 156).
X Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System
(ADS):
Set the ADS to AUTO or COMF
(Y page 156).
X Turn off the engine (Y page 108).
Z
Operation
The lowest value listed must be selected
when determining how the vehicle and
trailer are loaded.
255
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Driving instructions
256
X
Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Attach the trailer.
X Plug in all electrical connectors.
i Vehicles with vehicle level control:
When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle
level always remains in the highway setting.
The following applies additionally when
towing a trailer:
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 256
Version: 2.11.8.1
RThe
vehicle is lowered to the highway
level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if not set to highway level.
RThe
highspeed level is not available.
The restrictions that apply to towing also
apply when using accessories that are
connected to the trailer power socket, such
as a bicycle rack.
Towing a trailer
There are many different laws, including
speed limit restrictions, having to do with
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal,
not only for where you reside, but also for
where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be the police or local
authorities.
Note the following, when driving with a trailer:
RIn
order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should
practice turning, stopping and backing up
in an area which is free of traffic.
RBefore
you start driving check the
-
trailer hitch
-
break-away switch
-
safety chains
-
electrical connections
-
lighting
-
tires
the mirrors (Y page 89) to permit
unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.
RAdjust
RIf
the trailer has electric brakes, start your
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then
apply only the trailer brake controller by
hand to make sure the brakes are working
properly.
RAlways
secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
RWhen
towing a trailer, check occasionally
to make sure the load is secure, and that
trailer lighting and brakes (if so equipped)
are functioning properly.
RTake into consideration that when towing a
trailer, the handling characteristics are
different and less stable from those when
operating the vehicle without a trailer.
It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
RThe
vehicle and trailer combination is
heavier, and therefore limited in
acceleration and climbing ability, and has a
larger braking distance.
It is more prone to reacting to cross wind
gusts, and requires more sensitive steering
input.
RIf
possible, do not brake abruptly, but
rather engage the brake slightly at first to
permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
increase the braking force.
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce
the vehicle’s speed immediately.
Do not attempt to straighten out the tow
vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
RIf the transmission shifts between gears on
inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear
range manually (Y page 113). Select 4, 3,
2 or 1.
A lower gear and reduction of speed
reduces the chance of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
ROn
very steep inclines, not manageable
with automatic transmission in gear range
1, switch on off-road driving program
(Y page 155).
RWhen
going down an incline, shift into a
lower gear and use the engine’s braking
effect.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 257
Version: 2.11.8.1
Driving instructions
RIf
the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioning
is on, turn off the air conditioning system.
Engine coolant heat can be additionally
vented by opening the windows, switching
the climate control fan speed to high and
setting the temperature control to the
maximum.
RDuring
a passing maneuver extreme care
must be exercised since your vehicle with
a trailer will require additional passing
distance ahead than when driving without
a trailer.
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer
than your vehicle alone, you will also need
to go much farther ahead of the passed
vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Decoupling a trailer
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program: While
you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make
sure nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/
or opens or closes doors or the tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
switch or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (Y page 110).
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
(Y page 107).
X Start the engine (Y page 103).
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Engage the parking brake for the trailer.
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program: As
soon as you disconnect the electrical
connection between the trailer and the
vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid
personal injury, make sure no one is near the
wheel housing or underneath the vehicle
before the electrical connection is
disconnected.
When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle is
temporarily raised because the springs are
relieved of load. Be especially careful during
this process, as you could otherwise injure
yourself and/or others. Make sure that any
persons remaining in the vehicle do not press
the switches for vehicle level control or the
ADS.
X
Disconnect all electrical plug connectors.
Decouple the trailer.
X Make sure that the trailer coupling is free
of load.
X Turn off the engine (Y page 108).
X
Driving abroad
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
or Canada, you should request dealer
network information for your destination from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio
transmitter
Safety notes
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be his/her
primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
before placing or taking a telephone call.
Z
Operation
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating
the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so
equipped).
257
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Operation
258
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 258
Version: 2.11.8.1
Maintenance
If you choose to use the telephone22 while
driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the telephone when road, weather
and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Only operate the COMAND22 (Cockpit
Management and Data System) if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself
and others.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Maintenance
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
22 Observe
all legal requirements.
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks the distance driven and the time
elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance
service accordingly.
We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
indicator.
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Maintenance service indicator
message
Information on maintenance work and
maintenance intervals are specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
information.
The maintenance service indicator message
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is required.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is required, one of
the following messages will appear in the
multifunction display. The messages will
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 259
Version: 2.11.8.1
Maintenance
appear while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Service A In XXXXX Miles (km)
Service A In XX Days
Service A In X Day
Service A Due Now
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of
maintenance services and intervals they need
to be performed at.
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message
is cleared automatically
Rafter
approximately 10 seconds when you
switch on the ignition
Rafter
approximately 10 seconds when
reaching the service threshold while driving
Rafter
approximately 30 seconds, once the
suggested maintenance service term has
passed
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles
(Km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
Service A Exceeded By X Day
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance service.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(Y page 121).
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is required.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button V or U on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display (Y page 122)
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button * or & on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display with
the service symbol ¯ and the
maintenance service deadline appears in
the multifunction display.
i If the battery was disconnected, the days
X
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message manually: Press reset
button : on the instrument cluster.
The standard display appears in the
multifunction display.
259
of disconnection will not be included in the
count shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
service deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the
maintenance service indicator message or
maintenance service indicator display.
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
260
Vehicle care
Do not confuse the maintenance service
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
4.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
Operation
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 260
Version: 2.11.8.1
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
In the event that the maintenance service on
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
maintenance service indicator reset.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying
out the maintenance service will find the
information for resetting the maintenance
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Such literature is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
! If the maintenance service indicator was
RAir
reset inadvertently, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset the maintenance service
indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface to be cleaned.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
pollution
RRoad
salt
RTar
RGravel
and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
RGrease
and oil
RFuel
RCoolant
RBrake
RBird
fluid
droppings
RInsects
Notes
RTree
Regular and proper care will help to maintain
the value of your vehicle.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences.
G Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your
resins etc.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 261
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle care
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
Rnear
the ocean
Rin
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Rduring
winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
check is a washing of the underbody followed
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
necessary nor recommended by MercedesBenz because of the possibility of
incompatibility between materials used in the
production process and others applied later.
We have selected vehicle-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references to
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products.
261
Power washer
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on
maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
rubber parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body
components may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
be applied when water drops on the paint
surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
depending on the climate and washing
detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface shows
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax if
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
is still hot.
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
262
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 262
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle care
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
doors, etc.).
Operation
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components
and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Automatic car wash
You can have your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
car washes are preferable.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button d on
the climate control panel.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
running it through the automatic car wash.
! Make sure the combination switch is set
to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers
to move unintentionally. This may lead to
vehicle damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
clean the vehicle.
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
diffused jet of water.
X Do not spray directly towards the
ventilation intake.
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
and chamois frequently.
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
chamois thoroughly.
X
When taking the vehicle through an
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 111).
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 263
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle care
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
damaged when cleaned with chrome
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X Clean Distronic system sensor cover : by
hand.
To clean Distronic system sensor cover :
and the bumper area near sensors ; observe
the following:
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
RUse
a soft, non-scratching cloth.
! If you use a power washer to clean the
sensor covers, observe the following:
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses
RFollow
X
RMaintain
the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer.
a distance between the sensor
covers and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
Cleaning the rear view camera lens
Cleaning the driving systems sensors
X
Only use clean water and a soft, nonscratching cloth to clean rear view camera
lens :.
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
plenty of water.
Z
Operation
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
263
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 264
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle care
264
containing solvents. Do not touch the
inside of the windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
! Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera
Rwith
a high-pressure cleaner
Rwith
a dry cloth and strong pressure
Rwith
aggressive cleaning agents
Operation
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
are folded forward.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after
it has been cleaned. This applies especially
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
can lead to increased corrosion of the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel
paint if the vehicle is not driven after
cleaning.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
Wheel Care products, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
X
Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
detergent solution.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
Plastic and rubber parts
X
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
solution.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution.
The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
G Warning!
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 265
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle care
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents
will make the surface porous and vehicle
occupants could suffer serious injuries from
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
bag deployment.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
Hard plastic trim items
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
pressure.
COMAND display
! You must switch off the COMAND display
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
These can damage or even destroy the
COMAND display screen.
X
Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Steering wheel
X
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Carpets
X
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Headliner
X
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
X
265
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
(80†) or in direct sunlight.
G Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
be prevented.
G Warning!
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
interfere with or prevent
Rdeployment
of the front side impact air
bags
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags
Ractivation
of the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with MercedesBenz approved Leather Care.
Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
Z
Operation
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Vehicle care
266
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe
with light pressure only.
RDo
not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo
not soak the leather upholstery.
As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
Operation
RExercise
particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with
light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
X
Wood trims
X
Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 266
Version: 2.11.8.1
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 267
Version: 2.11.8.1
267
Vehicle equipment ............................
Where will I find ...? ..........................
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display .......................
What to do if … ..................................
Unlocking/locking manually ...........
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints .............
Replacing SmartKey batteries .........
Replacing bulbs .................................
Replacing wiper blades ....................
Flat tire ..............................................
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) .......................................
AdBlue®
(diesel engine only) ...........
Battery ...............................................
Jump starting ....................................
Towing the vehicle ............................
Fuses ..................................................
268
268
272
297
306
309
309
311
318
319
331
331
334
336
338
342
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 268
Version: 2.11.8.1
Where will I find ...?
268
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
RAlignment
RCollapsible
RElectric
RFuse
Practical hints
First aid kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
wheel chock 23
air pump24
chart
RJack23
RReversible
Where will I find ...?
bolt 23
ratchet for jack23
RTIREFIT
kit25
RTowing
eye bolt
RWheel
wrench23
RSpare
wheel bolts26
X
Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s side
in the cargo compartment behind the cover.
X
X
Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Fold down cover ;.
The first aid kit can be removed.
Push in floor handle ; as indicated by
arrow.
X Lift cargo compartment floor : using floor
handle ;.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
23 Vehicles
with spare wheel only.
24 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels and vehicles with spare wheel
with collapsible tire only.
350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels only.
26 Vehicles with Minispare wheel only.
25 ML
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 269
Version: 2.11.8.1
Where will I find ...?
269
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle. The illustration shows the
vehicle retrofitted with the necessary tools
for a wheel change.
Release securing hook = (located below
the floor handle) from holder.
Practical hints
X
: Towing eye bolt
; Alignment bolt
= Jack
? Fuse chart
X
Engage securing hook = on upper cargo
compartment lip ?.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed behind the rear seats, disengage
cargo compartment cover blind and flip it
forward. Otherwise the strap of the
securing hook could damage the cargo
compartment cover blind.
A Electric air pump27
B TIREFIT kit27
C Wheel wrench
D Collapsible wheel chock
E Reversible ratchet for jack
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Vehicles without spare wheel
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
27 ML
350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels only.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 270
Version: 2.11.8.1
Where will I find ...?
270
Vehicles with spare wheel
Collapsible wheel chock
Practical hints
The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
Example illustration
: Electric air pump28
; Storage well casing
= Alignment bolt
? Towing eye bolt
A Wheel wrench
X
To access remaining tools: Remove
storage well casing ; (if so equipped).
X Remove the spare wheel (Y page 271).
X
Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.
Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 324).
X
Jack
G Warning!
Example illustration
B Jack
C Collapsible wheel chock
D Fuse chart
E Spare wheel bolts29
F Reversible ratchet for jack
28 Vehicles
29 Vehicles
with spare wheel with collapsible tire only.
with Minispare wheel only.
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is
designed only for the purpose of changing a
wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety notes
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
the notes on the jack.
X
Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 268).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 271
Version: 2.11.8.1
Where will I find ...?
271
vehicles that are factory equipped with 20''
wheels come with TIREFIT.
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Lift the cargo compartment floor and
secure it on the upper cargo compartment
lip (Y page 268).
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
X
Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 268).
X
Practical hints
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Storage position
Remove the storage well casing (if so
equipped) (Y page 270).
Operational position
X
Attach reversible ratchet ; to jack : in
such a way that the word UP can be seen.
Before placing the jack and the reversible
ratchet back into the vehicle tool kit:
X
X
Fully collapse the jack (storage position).
Remove the reversible ratchet.
Example illustration
X
Remove retaining screw : by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Remove spare wheel ;.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 319).
Spare wheel
Storing the spare wheel after use
G Observe Safety notes, see page 319.
X
i USA only:
The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have
a spare wheel.
i Canada only:
The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have
a spare wheel. ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Place spare wheel ; into the spare wheel
well (Y page 271).
X Secure spare wheel ; by turning retaining
screw : clockwise (Y page 271).
X Place the storage well casing (if so
equipped) into the spare wheel
(Y page 270).
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
272
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Notes
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 272
Version: 2.11.8.1
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the Vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(Y page 128) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 118) or button
&, *, U or V on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button or button &, *,
U or V on the multifunction steering
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle
status message memory menu
(Y page 128). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
G Warning!
All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of
and, where a malfunction is indicated,
addressed as soon as possible at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside
temperature
Rwarning/indicator
lamps
Rmalfunction/warning
Rfailure
messages
of any systems
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
caution. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into text messages (Y page 273) and
symbol messages (Y page 283).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 273
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
273
Text messages
Safety systems
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ABS
The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
ABS, ESP
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the PREe
SAFE® system are unavailable.
See
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Operator’s
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Manual
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ABS
The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
ABS, ESP
Unavailabl The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
e
speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
See
Operator’s
Manual
ABS
ABS, ESP
Unavailabl
e See
Operator’s
Manual
The brake system still functions normally but due to
insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and
the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X If the message does not disappear: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
ESP
Inoperativ
e See
Operator’s
Manual
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.
The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
malfunction the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system
are unavailable.
The ABS may not be operational.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
274
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 274
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Practical hints
ESP
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
e See
insufficient power supply the ESP®, the BAS, and the
Operator’s PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Manual
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP®, the BAS, and the PRE-SAFE® system are operational
again and the message in the multifunction display should
disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X
X
Have the alternator and the battery checked.
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
ESP
Unavailabl
e See
Operator’s
Manual
ESP
Unavailabl The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
e See
The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
Operator’s speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual
PRE-SAFE
Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See
systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Operator’s X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual
possible.
If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while driving
and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the
drive wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 275
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front
Passenger
Airbag
Enabled
See
Operator’s
Manual
USA only:
The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
even though a child, small individual, or object below the
system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Remove any other items from on and around the front
passenger seat and make sure the parcel net on the back
of the front passenger seat is empty.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against
roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe
42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe
Z
275
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
276
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
G Warning!
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 276
Version: 2.11.8.1
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
If the 42 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 277
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front
Passenger
Airbag
Disabled
See
Operator’s
Manual
USA only:
The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
even though an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
vehicle.
X Adjust the seat height to a higher position (Y page 82).
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may
cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe
42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
277
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
278
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 278
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems
Practical hints
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cruise
Control
Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
e
X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Cruise
Control
- - - MPH
DISTRONIC
- - - Km/h One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not been
(Canada
fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
only)
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 147).
DISTRONIC
Inoperativ The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.
e
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
DISTRONIC
Override
You have accelerated. The Distronic has switched off.
X Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC
Available
Again
Distronic had been deactivated and is available again.
X Activate Distronic (Y page 147).
One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 142).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 279
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
DISTRONIC
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Currently Distronic is deactivated because:
Unavailabl RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
e
RThe functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog.
See
Operator’s RThe system is overheated.
Manual
X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the area of the
radiator grille (Y page 263).
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled down.
X Restart the vehicle.
Distronic becomes operational again without the engine being
restarted when:
Rdirt
on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe
system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe
message in the multifunction display disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
DISTRONIC
Currently Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired
Unavailabl by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such
as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.
e
See
X Leave the area of the external interference.
Operator’s X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 147) when the message
Manual
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not
sensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X Activate Distronic again (Y page 147) when the message
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
G Warning!
Distronic cannot take weather conditions into
account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it
on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The
distance control may be impaired even before
the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The
message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will
be displayed in the multifunction display and
Distronic will be turned off.
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
279
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
280
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 280
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Depress
brake to
shift out
of P.
You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Practical hints
Door Open
Vehicle
Not In
Park
You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
transmission is in park position P and the parking brake is
engaged.
Drive to
workshop
without
shifting
gears.
The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the
current transmission position because of a malfunction.
If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to neutral position N,
reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Only
shift to
P when
vehicle
is at a
standstill
.
You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
X Stop the vehicle.
Shift to
P or N to
start
engine.
You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button while the automatic transmission was in
reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Auxiliary
Battery
Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no
longer charging.
n
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 281
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
281
Tires
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
tires,
There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
then
inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
restart
was not restarted yet.
Run Flat
Indicator. X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 222).
Run Flat
Indicator
Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
e
X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire
Pressure
Check
Tires
The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 319).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 222).
Tire
pressure
displayed
after
driving
for a few
minutes.
The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
TPMS.
X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire
Pressure
Monitor
Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
e
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire
Pressure
Monitor
Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
(e.g. winter tires).
e No
Wheel
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Practical hints
282
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 282
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire
Pressure
Monitor
At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wheel
Sensor
Missing
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is
mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire
Pressure
Monitor
Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
power supply.
e
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Tire
Pressure(s
) Please
Correct
The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
or
The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
multifunction display.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 226).
Caution:
Tire
Defect
At least one tire is deflating.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 283
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire(s)
The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
283
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
Display messages
#
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
Practical hints
G Warning!
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
284
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 284
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
$
(USA only)
J
Practical hints
(Canada
only)
$
(USA only)
!
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
EBV, ABS, The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
ESP
malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, the ESP®, and the
Inoperativ PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
e See
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Operator’s
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Manual
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Release
Parking
Brake
You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
an acoustic warning sounds.
X Release the parking brake.
Check
Brake
Fluid
Level
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Risk of accident!
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so.
X Engage the parking brake
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
(Canada
only)
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada
only)
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 285
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
285
Safety systems
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Tele Aid
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e
X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
+
Restraint The system is malfunctioning.
Sys.
X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
n
immediately.
Service
Required
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not
be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
which could also result in injury.
Driving systems
Display messages
Á
Level
Selection
Not
Permitted
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The selected vehicle level cannot be adjusted, because
Ryou
are driving too fast for the desired vehicle level
Ryou
are towing a trailer
Ryou
are using accessories that are connected to the trailer
power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack
X
Reduce vehicle speed and set the desired vehicle level
again (Y page 156).
X Observe the notes on trailer towing (Y page 254).
Á
Malfunctio The air suspension is malfunctioning.
n
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
286
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 286
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Á
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level. Due to frequent level
changes within a short period, the compressor must cool
Cooling
down first.
Down
! When the message Compressor Cooling Down appears
in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in
mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached,
so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle.
Practical hints
X
Ã
Let the compressor cool down until the message
disappears.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has
cooled down.
Inoperativ Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.
e
X Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
E
You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 214) or the tailgate (Y page 75).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO
function with a door or the tailgate open.
X Close all doors and/or the tailgate (Y page 75).
;
You are driving with at least one door open.
X Close all doors.
+
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was
Key
recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
Detected
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+
Don’t
Forget
Your Key
This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the
driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 287
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
287
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
+
The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
You need
a new key. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
+
Key Does
Not
Belong to
Vehicle
The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
vehicle.
X Find the SmartKey that belongs to the vehicle to operate
the vehicle.
+
Change
Key
Batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are
discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
+
Key Not
Detected
(message
appears in
red)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+
Key Not
Detected
(message
appears in
red)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
interference.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+
Key Not
Detected
(message
appears in
white)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.
X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
starter switch (Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+
Pull
starting
button
out then
insert
key.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is permanently not detected.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
288
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 288
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Practical hints
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
~
Bluetooth
Ready
The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND
system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
¥
Top Up
Washer
Fluid
The fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of total
reservoir capacity.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 217).
Engine
Display messages
+
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The coolant level is too low.
Top Up
Coolant
X Add coolant (Y page 216).
See
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator’s
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 289
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
?
Coolant
Stop car,
switch
engine
off.
289
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The coolant is too hot.
X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
290
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 290
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Practical hints
?
Coolant
Stop car,
switch
engine
off.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
?
The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
#
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
Ralternator
Rbroken
Ra
X
malfunctioning
poly-V-belt
malfunction in the electronic system
Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 291
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
The battery is defective.
Battery/
Alternator X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Stop
to do so.
Vehicle
X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
4
The engine oil level is too low.
Check
engine
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 214) and add engine oil
oil level
as required (Y page 215).
at next
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
refueling.
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check engine oil level
at next refueling. appears while the
engine is running and at operating
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum level.
The message will be stored in the vehicle
status message memory after you have
cleared it from the multifunction display.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
For information on approved engine oils
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
C
The fuel level is low.
X Refuel at the next gas station.
8
Reserve
Fuel
8
Ultra Low- Vehicles with diesel engine only:
sulfur
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Diesel
X Refuel at the next gas station.
Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM).
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
X Refuel at the next gas station.
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
291
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
292
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 292
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Practical hints
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
8
Gas Cap
Open
¸
The air filter is clogged.
Replace
air filter X Have the air filter checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
·
Clean
Fuel
Filter
Ø
Check
The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.
Additive
X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as possible
See
(Y page 331).
Operator's
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
Ø
Remaining The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the minimum level.
Starts: 20 X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately (Y page 331).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 212).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is water in the fuel filter.
X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
i When the message Remaining
Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
display, you can start the engine 20 more
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the
engine cannot be started beyond that
point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with
approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
(corresponds to approximately 2 refill
containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the
engine can be started again.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 293
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
293
Lamps
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.
Active
Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ
possible.
e
b
The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
Reverse
Lamp Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Reverse
Lamp Right
b
Brake
Lamp Left
or
Brake
Lamp Right
The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear lamps with bulbs: A substitute bulb is being used.
Rear lamps with LEDs: This message will only appear if all
LEDs have stopped working.
X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
possible (Y page 311).
X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
b
3rd Brake
Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This
message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b
Front
Foglamp
Left
or
Front
Foglamp
Right
The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b
The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Marker
Lamp
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
Front Left
or
Marker
Lamp
Front
Right
Z
Practical hints
Display messages
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
294
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 294
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Practical hints
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A
Parking
substitute bulb is being used.
Lamp
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Parking
Lamp
Front
Right
b
High Beam
Left
or
High Beam
Right
b
The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
License
Plate
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
Lamp Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp Right
b
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on
AUTO
automatically.
Light
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e
possible.
The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.
X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X
In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 133).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 93).
b
Low Beam
Left
or
Low Beam
Right
The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.
X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
b
Foglamp
Rear Left
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear lamps with LEDs: A substitute bulb is being used.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 295
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
295
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Switch
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 93).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
b
Tail Lamp
Left
or
Tail Lamp
Right
b
Cornering The left or right corner-illuminating front fog lamp is
Lamp Left malfunctioning.
or
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Cornering
possible.
Lamp Right
b
The left or right trailer brake lamp is malfunctioning.
Trailer
Brake Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
b
Trailer
Tail Lamp
Left
or
Trailer
Tail Lamp
Right
The left or right trailer tail lamp is malfunctioning.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
b
Trailer
Turn
Signal
Left
or
Trailer
Turn
Signal
Right
The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear lamps with bulbs: A substitute bulb is being used.
Rear lamps with LEDs: This message will only appear if all
LEDs have stopped working.
X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
possible (Y page 311).
X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
296
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 296
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Practical hints
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A
Turn
substitute bulb is being used.
Signal
Rear Left X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
or
possible (Y page 311).
Turn
X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized MercedesSignal
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Rear Right
b
The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A
Turn
substitute bulb is being used.
Signal
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
b
Turn
Signal
Left
Mirror
or
Turn
Signal
Right
Mirror
The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
Tire
pressure(s
) Please
Correct
The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
or
The tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ from
each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
h
Tire
Pressure
Caution:
Tire
Defect
At least one tire is deflating.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 297
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Display messages
h
Tire
Pressure
Check
Tires
297
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
below the reference value.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
Notes
If any of the following lamps in the instrument
cluster fails to come on during the bulb selfcheck when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary.
Z
Practical hints
G Warning!
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
298
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 298
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Brake
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! The yellow ABS
indicator lamp
comes on while
the engine is
running.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
systems specified above available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
! The yellow ABS
indicator lamp
comes on while
the engine is
running.
The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
! The yellow ABS
indicator lamp
comes on while
the engine is
running.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Practical hints
Problem
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 299
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
!
d
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving. In addition, the
yellow ABS malfunction
indicator lamp, and the
yellow ESP® warning
lamp come on and an
acoustic warning
sounds.
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
malfunction.
The ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
Practical hints
Problem
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
the engine is running
and an acoustic
warning sounds.
G Warning!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Risk of accident!
X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
Driving with the brake warning lamp
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
299
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
300
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 300
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Practical hints
Safety systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
7 The red seat belt
telltale comes
on for a
maximum of
6 seconds after
starting the
engine.
The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
your seat belts before driving off.
X Fasten your seat belts.
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes
X Fasten your seat belt.
on. In addition
The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt
telltale comes
on while the
vehicle is
standing still
and the engine is
running or while
driving.
You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt
telltale flashes
while driving. In
addition, an
intermittent
warning chime
sounds with
increasing
intensity.
The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
X Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 301
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
301
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+ The red SRS
indicator lamp
comes on while
driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
or fail to activate in an accident.
X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not
be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
which could also result in injury.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
d The yellow ESP®
warning lamp
comes on while
the engine is
running.
The ESP® has been switched off.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning.
X
Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp
Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
multifunction display.
running.
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Z
Practical hints
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
302
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 302
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ESP®
Practical hints
d The yellow
warning lamp
flashes while
driving.
The ESP® or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because of
detected traction loss in at least one tire.
The cruise control is deactivated.
X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
At least one wheel is spinning and the Electronic Traction System
(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
multifunction display.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
Driving systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
· The red distance You are too close to the vehicle in front of you to maintain selected
warning lamp
speed.
comes on while X Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following
driving.
distance.
· The red distance You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or the
warning lamp
distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on
comes on while your probable line of travel.
driving and an
X Apply the brakes immediately.
acoustic
X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
warning sounds.
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 303
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
303
Vehicle
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow fuel tank
The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! (USA only)
; (Canada only)
The yellow engine
malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction in
Rthe
fuel management system
Rthe
ignition system
Rthe
emission control system
Rsystems
which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
! (USA only)
; (Canada only)
The yellow engine
malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 210).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was driven empty.
X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.
Z
Practical hints
Engine
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
304
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 304
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
Practical hints
Tires
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h USA only:
Combination
low tire pressure
telltale/TPMS
malfunction
telltale for the
Advanced TPMS
illuminates
continuously.
The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 272).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
h USA only:
Combination
low tire pressure
telltale/TPMS
malfunction
telltale for the
Advanced TPMS
flashes 60
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 272).
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
of driving.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door Bpillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately 1 minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 305
Version: 2.11.8.1
What to do if …
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
305
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Canada only:
42
The front passenger
front air bag off
indicator lamp
illuminates and
remains illuminated
(Y page 47).
A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Canada only:
42
The front passenger
front air bag off
indicator lamp does not
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed
on the passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning.
X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 58).
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
USA only:
42
The front passenger
front air bag off
indicator lamp
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning.
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
Z
Practical hints
Lamp in center console
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
306
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 306
Version: 2.11.8.1
Unlocking/locking manually
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
Practical hints
Problem
than a small individual on the front passenger
seat, do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
USA only:
The system is malfunctioning.
42
X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
and check installation of the child seat.
The front passenger
front air bag off
X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not
seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
not remain illuminated
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or
with the weight of a
around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
typical 12-month-old
system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
child in a standard child X
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
restraint or less on the
out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
front passenger seat.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
and
Ropen
the driver’s door
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
the starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you
Runlocking
the driver’s door with the
mechanical key
SmartKey
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 307
Version: 2.11.8.1
Unlocking/locking manually
307
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X
Move locking tab : in the direction of
arrow.
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the right
rear door, and the tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 75).
The locking knobs of the front passenger
door and the rear doors move down.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained: Press down the locking knobs on
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Close the driver’s door.
X
X
Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.
Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
door.
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
X
Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s
door lock.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
to position 1.
X Pull the door handle past the resistance
point until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
X Pull the door handle once more to open the
driver’s door.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
it from the driver’s door lock.
X
X
Exit the vehicle.
Close the rear left door.
The vehicle is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the antitheft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap.
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked and
opened using button F on the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO function, use the
emergency release lever to unlock and open
the tailgate.
The emergency release lever is located on the
inside of the tailgate.
Z
Practical hints
Locking the vehicle
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 308
Version: 2.11.8.1
Unlocking/locking manually
308
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Fuel filler flap
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
Practical hints
G Warning!
X
Remove cover ; from the trim on the
tailgate.
X Push emergency release lever : all the
way to the left.
! The tailgate swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
X
Open the tailgate.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
filler flap.
In case the central locking system does not
release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
manually.
The fuel filler flap release is located on the
passenger side in the cargo compartment
behind the cover.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Open the cover on the passenger-side trim
panel (Y page 316).
from the outside using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO, opening the tailgate from the
inside using the emergency release lever
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
RInsert the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
RPress
button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RPull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m)
of the vehicle.
X
RPress
X
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
X
Reinstall cover ;.
X
Pull yellow fuel filler flap release : in
direction of arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 210).
Close the cover.
X Close the tailgate.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 309
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
have been triggered in a rear-end collision,
they must be reset.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when
they have been moved forward and cannot be
adjusted.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a
rear-end collision.
G Warning!
When pushing back the head restraint
cushion, make sure your fingers do not
become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back
requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X
Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in
direction of arrow : as far as it will go.
X Adjust the head restraint cushion
downward in direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
X
Firmly press the top of the head restraint
cushion towards the head restraint cover in
direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO
active front head restraint for the second
front seat.
For information on NECK-PRO active front
head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front
head restraints” (Y page 53).
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
Z
Practical hints
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active
front head restraints
309
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 310
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing SmartKey batteries
310
i The required replacement batteries are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 306).
X
Slide mechanical key : back into the
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Practical hints
SmartKey
X
X
Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening until battery compartment
cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
shut.
Insert mechanical key : into opening.
X Press mechanical key : in direction of
arrow.
Battery compartment ; is unlatched.
X Pull battery compartment ; out of the
SmartKey housing.
X
X
Remove the battery compartment cover.
Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
hand until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
cover into the housing and press the cover
closed.
X
Pull out batteries =.
Insert new batteries = under contact
springs ? with the positive terminal (+)
side facing up.
X Return battery compartment ; into
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
X Slide mechanical key : back into the
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
X
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 311
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
Rtouch
Rdrop
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
highly demanding process, we recommend
to have them replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
or move it when hot
the bulb
Rscratch
311
the bulb
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
312
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 312
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Practical hints
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps
Type
: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam lamp/High-beam flasher
lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: 3457A
A Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Type
: High-beam flasher lamp/High-beam
flasher spot lamp: H7 55 W
; Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: 3457A
? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Standard rear lamps
Type
: Brake lamp: P 21 W
; Backup lamp: P 21 W
= Tail lamp, parking and standing lamp,
rear foglamp (driver’s side only): P 21 W
? Side marker lamp: P 21 W
A Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 313
Version: 2.11.8.1
LED rear lamps
Type
: Backup lamp: W 16 W
; Rear foglamp (driver’s side only):
W 16 W
= Rear foglamp (driver’s side only):
W 16 W
License plate lamps
Type
: License plate lamps: C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
bulbs replaced at an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
with the specified watt rating.
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
313
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
i Mercedes-Benz recommends using
Longlife (LL) bulbs.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
lamp, do the following:
X Switch off the ignition.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
X Open the hood (Y page 212).
RAlways
use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
RIf
the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
314
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 314
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
X
Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket B with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
Practical hints
Example illustration: Driver’s side headlamp
: Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-
Xenon headlamp
; Housing cover for high-beam halogen
bulb (high beam and high-beam flasher)
= Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
bulb
? Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
A Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb
G Warning!
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a
qualified technician.
X
Pull bulb E out of bulb socket B.
i Do not remove clip D from bulb socket
B.
X
Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
B.
X Place bulb socket B back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only)
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
(halogen headlamps only)/high-beam
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps only)
B Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp
C Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 315
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
Turn housing cover ; counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket C with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket C.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
C.
X Place bulb socket C back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Align housing cover ; and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Parking and standing lamp bulb,
front turn signal lamp bulb,
side marker lamp bulb
Opening the driver’s side trim panel
X
X
Turn lock : counterclockwise by 90°.
Remove cover ;.
Practical hints
X
Removing storage compartment
X
Turn respective bulb socket =, ? or A
(Y page 314) with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
X Place bulb socket =, ? or A back into
the housing and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following:
X
X
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
Tail lamp unit
315
Example illustration: Storage compartment
without sound system
X
Remove everything from storage
compartment ;.
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Remove storage compartment ;.
To access the tail lamp units, you first have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side
trim panel of the cargo compartment.
X Open the tailgate.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 316
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
316
Practical hints
Opening the passenger-side trim panel
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
Replacing bulbs
Example illustration: Standard rear lamp driver’s
side
: Brake lamp bulb socket
; Rear turn signal lamp bulb socket
= Side marker lamp bulb socket
? Tail lamp, parking and standing lamp and
rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) bulb
socket
A Backup lamp bulb socket
Example illustration: LED rear lamp driver’s side
: Backup lamp bulb socket
; Rear fog lamp bulb sockets (driver’s side
only)
X
Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn the respective bulb socket
counterclockwise.
X Pull the bulb socket out of the housing.
X Standard rear lamp: Gently press onto the
bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
LED rear lamp: Pull the bulb out of its bulb
socket.
X Standard rear lamp: Gently press the new
bulb into its bulb socket and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
LED rear lamp: Gently press the new bulb
into its bulb socket.
X Align the bulb socket and turn it clockwise.
X Make sure the bulb socket is attached
properly.
X Close the respective cover in the cargo
compartment.
X Close the tailgate.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 317
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamps
317
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. High beam adjustments
simultaneously aim the low beam. To check
and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps
described:
X
X
Loosen screws : of lamp cover to be
removed.
X Remove lamp cover ;.
X Replace the bulb.
X Reinstall lamp cover ;.
X Retighten screws :.
If the beam does not show a beam pattern as
indicated in the figure left, then follow the
steps below:
X
Open the hood (Y page 212).
Adjusting headlamp aim
: V Vertical centerline
; H Horizontal mounting height, measured
from the center
The adjustment screws are located under the
cover panel.
X Insert a suitable tool into the openings in
the panel cover. The direction of arrows
= and ? indicate the angle in which the
tool has to be inserted in oder to access the
adjustment screws.
X Always turn the adjustment screws equally
for vertical adjustment until the headlamp
is adjusted as shown in :. Turn clockwise
for upward movement and
counterclockwise for downward
movement.
Graduations:
RScrew
at arrow =: 0.67° pitch
RScrew
at arrow ?: 0.50° pitch
The left and right headlamps must be
adjusted individually.
Z
Practical hints
Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet
(7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.
X Make sure the vehicle has a normal tailgate
load.
X Switch on the low beam headlamps L.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 318
Version: 2.11.8.1
Replacing wiper blades
318
i If it is not possible to obtain a proper
headlamp adjustment, have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Removing wiper blades
Front wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
Replacing wiper blades
X
Safety notes
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
engage.
Practical hints
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windows will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield or the rear window.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (Y page 80).
X
Press tabs ; together.
Tilt wiper blade : away from wiper arm
=.
X Take off wiper blade : in direction of
arrow.
X
Rear wiper blade
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
could tear.
X
Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
X Turn wiper blade ; as far as it will go.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 319
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
X
Hold wiper arm : and disengage wiper
blade ; by carefully sliding it in direction
of arrow.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
319
Rear wiper blade
Installing wiper blades
X
Insert wiper blade ; into wiper arm :.
Hold wiper arm : and engage wiper
blade ; by pushing it in direction of arrow
until it locks into place.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
X Fold wiper arm : to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
X
X
With guide tab = sliding into opening ?,
place wiper blade : onto wiper arm in
direction of arrow.
X Fold wiper blade : towards wiper arm.
Tabs ; (Y page 318) must engage into
both recesses of attachment ;.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm
when folding it back.
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
! Make sure the wiper blade is installed
properly. An improperly installed wiper
blade may cause rear window damage.
Flat tire
Safety notes
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
Ra
Minispare wheel
Ra
spare wheel with collapsible tire
Ran
MOExtended system (your vehicle does
not have a spare wheel or a TIREFIT kit)
TIREFIT kit30 (your vehicle does not have
a spare wheel)
Ra
For information on your vehicle’s equipment,
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 352).
30 Canada
only.
Z
Practical hints
Front wiper blades
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Flat tire
320
G Warning!
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 320
Version: 2.11.8.1
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program:
Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate
while mounting a spare wheel. The vehicle
could rise or lower to a previously selected
level. You or others could be injured as a
result.
Preparing the vehicle
X
Vehicles with air suspension program:
Make sure the vehicle level is set to
highway level (Y page 155).
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
flat surface.
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed again.
Open doors only when conditions are safe
to do so.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
starter switch.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway. Open
doors only when conditions are safe to do
so.
i Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible
tire or TIREFIT:
Only use the power outlet in the secondrow footwell for electric air pump
operation.
You can use the power outlet even when
the ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to
inflate the collapsible tire.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
minimum level, the power outlets are
switched off automatically to help preserve
engine starting power.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT
Small tire punctures, particularly those in the
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures
down to -4‡ (-20†).
G Warning!
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 321
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
damage caused by driving with extremely low
tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a
damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such
circumstances.
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center for assistance or call Roadside
Assistance.
X
Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the
electric air pump out of the cargo
compartment (Y page 268).
G Warning!
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.
If clothing has come in contact with
TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with
perchloroethylene as soon as possible.
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion
1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion
Two-part sticker
X
Attach upper part : of the sticker where
it will be easily seen by the driver on the
instrument cluster.
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).
2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
The following description applies to both
versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
321
Version 1
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Flat tire
322
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 322
Version: 2.11.8.1
Version 2
Version 1
X
X
Version 1 only: Open flap C on the
electric air pump.
X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump
housing.
X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto
flange B of TIREFIT container :.
X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down
into notch ; of the electric air pump.
Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on
pressure gauge G.
X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E.
X Insert electrical plug ? into the power
outlet in the second-row footwell
(Y page 197).
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo
compartment are not designed for use with
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet
in the second-row footwell for electric air
pump operation.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
or
X
Example illustration
X
Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire
from tire valve E.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Press I on electric air pump switch =.
The electric air pump is switched on and
inflates the tire.
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
(5 bar). This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction. Do not switch off the
electric air pump.
X
Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for
approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
26 psi (1.8 bar).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 323
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
G Warning!
detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT
sealant may cause stains.
Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by
inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT
kit was packed in.
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
! Do not operate the electric air pump
If the tire inflation pressure of at least
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained:
X
Turn off the electric air pump by pressing
0 on electric air pump switch =.
X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E.
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
sealant material inside the tire.
X Inflate the tire again.
X
Drive off immediately.
G Warning!
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
by the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
G Warning!
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, the tire is too severely
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire
repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the
tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance.
After attaining a tire inflation pressure of
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar):
X
Press 0 on electric air pump switch =.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve.
G Warning!
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself when
detaching the electric air pump.
! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape
Version 2
X
After driving the vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check the tire inflation
pressure using pressure gauge G on the
air pump.
G Warning!
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the
roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
from the filler hose after it has been
Z
Practical hints
longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
323
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 324
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
324
If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
(1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the
correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar):
Practical hints
X
To increase tire inflation pressure:
Switch on the electric air pump.
X To decrease tire inflation pressure:
Version 1: Open vent screw F on
pressure gauge G (Y page 322).
Version 2: Press deflate button F located
at the end of the filler hose.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified workshop,
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
to have the damaged tire replaced.
X Recommended duration of use: A
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended
tire inflation pressure.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a new
TIREFIT kit.
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
X Replace your TIREFIT container every
4 years. Replacement containers are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mounting the spare wheel
Introduction
X
Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 320).
X Take the following out of the vehicle:
Rspare wheel
Rjack
Rwheel
wrench
Rcollapsible
wheel chock
Ralignment
bolt
Relectric
air pump (required for vehicles
with spare wheel with collapsible tire
only)
For information on where to find the
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
(Y page 268) and (Y page 271).
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle. This section describes the
wheel change using the tools approved and
recommended for your vehicle.
Lifting the vehicle
G Warning!
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
which has been specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up
bracket. The jack must always be vertical
when in use, especially on inclines or
declines.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
Always engage the parking brake firmly and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 325
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 268). For information on setting up
the collapsible wheel chock, see
(Y page 270).
G Warning!
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
others.
Changing a wheel on a level surface
Changing rear wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
X
Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
object in front of and another wheel chock
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Changing a wheel on a slight decline
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
decline:
Practical hints
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
325
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
X
Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
Changing a wheel on a slight incline
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
incline:
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Flat tire
326
X
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 326
Version: 2.11.8.1
Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
X
On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench :).
X Assemble the jack (Y page 270).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
G Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
others.
! Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
X
Attach reversible ratchet ? to jack = in
such a way that the word UP can be seen.
X Place jack = on firm ground.
X Position jack = under take-up
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
X
Turn ratchet ? up and down until jack =
is fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
jack base evenly meets the ground.
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 327
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
327
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X
Practical hints
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and
remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt :.
X Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X
Remove the wheel.
Attaching the spare wheel
G Warning!
Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire
only: Inflate collapsible tire only after the
wheel is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
Wheel bolt : must be used for 18", 19", 20"
and 21" light alloy wheels as well as the spare
wheel with collapsible tire. Wheel bolt ;
must be used for the Minispare wheel. The
wheel bolts for the Minispare wheel are
located in vehicle tool kit.
! Wheel bolts ; must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of
any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts ;
for the Minispare wheel will damage the
vehicle’s brakes.
G Warning!
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
X
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 328
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
328
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion
1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion
2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
Practical hints
X
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment
bolt and push it on.
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X Vehicles with spare wheel with
collapsible tire: Continue the procedure
by following the instructions under
“Inflating the collapsible tire”
(Y page 328) and then “Lowering the
vehicle” (Y page 329).
or
X Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Continue
the procedure by following the instructions
under “Lowering the vehicle”
(Y page 329).
The following description applies to both
versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
Version 1
Inflating the collapsible tire
G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may
be damaged.
Version 2
X
Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric
air pump.
X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
= and air hose with pressure gauge and
vent screw ?.
X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and
the air hose out of the pump housing
bottom.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 329
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
X
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo
compartment are not designed for use with
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet
in the second-row footwell for electric air
pump operation.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;.
The electric air pump switches on and
inflates the collapsible tire.
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the
recommended tire inflation pressure as
specified for your vehicle (Y page 356).
This should take approximately 5 minutes.
G Warning!
The air hose and the union nut can become
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
to avoid burning yourself when using the
equipment.
! Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
! Compare the recommended tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle with the tire
inflation pressure on the yellow label
located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
X
X
Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 356), decrease tire pressure using
the vent screw on air hose ?.
X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 356), decrease tire pressure using
deflate button B.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 221.
X
Detach the electric air pump.
Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =
and air hose ? behind flap :.
X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =
and the air hose back into the pump
housing bottom.
X Place the electric air pump back in its
designated storage space.
X Lower the vehicle.
X
Lowering the vehicle
G Warning!
Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire
only: Inflate collapsible tire only after the
wheel is properly attached.
Z
Practical hints
Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
hose ?.
X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
tire valve.
X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire
valve.
X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
X Insert electrical plug = into the power
outlet in the second-row footwell
(Y page 197).
329
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 330
Version: 2.11.8.1
Flat tire
330
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
X
Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the
word DOWN can be seen.
Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting
fully on its own weight:
Turn ratchet in direction DOWN.
X
Remove the jack.
X
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence illustrated
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Practical hints
X
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
X
Fully collapse the jack to storage position,
see (Y page 270).
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
in the designated storage space.
For information on storing the spare wheel
after it has been replaced by a regular road
wheel, see (Y page 271).
i The damaged road wheel cannot be
stored in the spare wheel well under the
cargo compartment floor. It should be
transported in the cargo compartment
wrapped in a protective wrap.
i USA only:
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
functioning sensor has been placed back
into service on the vehicle.
MOExtended system
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the tire pressure loss
warning system (Y page 222) or the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223).
The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving
distance in emergency mode begins is when
the warning message appears in the
multifunction display indicating that there is
a loss of tire inflation pressure.
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
G Warning!
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such
situations as:
Rdriving
around curves
Rwhile
braking
Rwhile
accelerating rapidly
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted
accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles
(road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This
is especially important if the vehicle is heavily
loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can be
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 331
Version: 2.11.8.1
significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven
cautiously, somewhat longer.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode if
Ryou
notice knocking sounds
Rthe
vehicle starts to shake
Rsmoke
RESP®
Ryou
develops and you smell rubber
is intervening continuously
notice tears on the tire sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
When replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only tires marked with
“MOExtended” are mounted in the size
specified for your vehicle (Y page 352).
of 10 seconds or until the engine runs
surge-free.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
once more to position 2 for at least
10 seconds.
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
once more to position 3 and hold it there
for a maximum of 10 seconds or until the
engine runs surge-free.
X If necessary, repeat the above steps.
If the engine still does not start after
3 attempts:
Do not make any further attempts to start the
engine. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or call Roadside Assistance
(Y page 201).
i When the malfunction indicator lamp
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty
is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens,
the malfunction indicator lamp = (USA
only) or ; (Canada only) comes on and the
engine may not start immediately after
refueling the vehicle.
After refueling:
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
X Do not depress the accelerator.
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button from the starter switch.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 for at least 10 seconds.
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum
= (USA only) or ; (Canada only) in
the instrument cluster has been illuminated
for the above condition, it will remain
illuminated until the engine was cycled on
and off four times in a row.
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
in order to function properly. Refilling with
AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
suffice until the next maintenance service
under normal driving conditions.
When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
Check Additive See Operator’s
Manual appears in the multifunction display.
When the AdBlue® level drops to the
minimum level, the message Remaining
Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
display.
Z
Practical hints
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 331
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
332
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
i When the message Remaining Starts:
20 appears in the multifunction display, you
can start the engine 20 more times. If you
do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be
started beyond that point. Fill the
AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
(3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers)
or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i For refilling outside the maintenance
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 332
Version: 2.11.8.1
service intervals, refill the AdBlue® tank
with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
(corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue®
refill containers).
Always use the particular AdBlue® refill
containers for refilling outside the
maintenance service interval. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance if necessary
(Y page 201).
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refilling with AdBlue®
G Warning!
Make sure
RAdBlue®
does not come into contact with
skin, eyes, or clothing
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children
If you and/or others have come into contact
with AdBlue®:
AdBlue® has gotten into contact with
eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately
and seek medical help.
RIf
RClean affected skin immediately with plenty
of water.
AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Consult a physician.
RIf
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must
not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
engine could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 333
Version: 2.11.8.1
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 333
X
Pull dust cap off of AdBlue® refill container
=.
X
Place AdBlue® refill container = on the
filler neck as illustrated and tighten it
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it
clockwise.
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill
X
container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight,
as you could otherwise damage it.
AdBlue®
Turn
filler cap cover :
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Push AdBlue® refill container = down.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up
to 1 minute.
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill
container.
X
Release AdBlue® refill container =.
X
X
Turn AdBlue® filler cap ;
counterclockwise and open it.
Filler cap ; is tethered with a plastic strap.
Turn AdBlue® refill container =
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ; (Y page 332) on
filler neck and turn it clockwise.
Z
Practical hints
For more information on AdBlue®, see
(Y page 361).
The AdBlue® filler neck is located under the
cargo compartment floor.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Lift the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 268).
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 334
Version: 2.11.8.1
Battery
334
X
Place AdBlue® filler cap cover : as
illustrated and turn it clockwise to its stop.
X Lower cargo compartment floor.
X Close the tailgate.
X Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least
10 mph (16 km/h).
The message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual disappears after
approximately 1 minute.
G Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and
precautions when handling automotive
batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries.
Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Do
not allow it to come into
contact with skin, eyes or
clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially gloves,
apron and faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills
immediately with clear
water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Keep children away.
Practical hints
i If the message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual still appears in the
multifunction display, refill with one more
container of AdBlue®.
i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if
necessary, filled completely afterward at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Battery
Safety notes
A battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
Follow the instructions in
this Operator’s Manual.
A battery contains materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly. A
large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
Recycling of the battery is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept the old battery for
recycling.
G Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
You might get injured.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 335
Version: 2.11.8.1
Battery
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
G Warning!
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Take care that you do not become statically
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials.
Never touch the battery first. First touch the
outside body of the vehicle in order to release
any possible electrostatic charges.
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark
formation.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
“fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
therefore do not have cell caps and the
battery cover is non-removable. Do not
attempt to open the battery as otherwise
the battery will be damaged.
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of
the electrolyte level. They cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level.
However, the battery condition must be
checked periodically by performing a
battery conductance test. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
testing intervals.
335
The factory-equipped battery may only be
replaced with a battery that
Rhas
the same security features
Ris
of identical size
Ris
of identical voltage
Ris
of identical capacity
! As any other battery, the battery may
discharge if you do not operate the vehicle
for an extended period of time. Have the
battery disconnected at a qualified
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center in such a case. You may also
connect an accessory battery charge unit
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model to maintain the battery
charge. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for further information.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose
and the lateral plug must always be
securely installed when the vehicle is in
operation.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch or
KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely
damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
i After battery power was interrupted, do
the following:
the clock (Y page 132).
Vehicles with COMAND system with
navigation module: Time and date are set
automatically.
RSet
RSynchronize
the door windows
(Y page 102).
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
336
Jump starting
RSynchronize
the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Y page 186).
RSynchronize
the exterior rear view
mirrors (Y page 91).
Charging the battery
G Warning!
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 336
Version: 2.11.8.1
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during
charging and could cause an explosion that
may result in personal injury, paint damage or
corrosion.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
Have the battery charged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
battery yourself, follow the operating
instructions for your charging device.
Only use a battery charge unit with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
X Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Jump starting
G Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or
jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the automatic
transmission which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Jump starting should only be performed
using the jump-start terminals located in
the engine compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 337
Version: 2.11.8.1
Jump starting
damage the catalytic converter31 and may
present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started with jumper cables and the fully
charged battery of another vehicle or an
equivalent starter pack. Observe the
following:
RAccess
to the battery is not possible on all
vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
of the other vehicle, provide jump start
power by an external battery or starter
pack.
RJump
starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter32
are cold.
RDo
not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
ROnly
jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
31 Vehicles
32 Vehicles
337
with a more powerful battery could damage
the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
damage will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ROnly
use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
RAlways
make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
that move when an engine is started or
running.
RShould
the battery be drained completely,
let the donating power source charge the
vehicle for several minutes before
reattempting the starting process.
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X Open the hood (Y page 213).
with gasoline engine only.
with gasoline engine only.
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 338
Version: 2.11.8.1
Towing the vehicle
Practical hints
338
Position C represents the charged battery of
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack.
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal = in
direction of arrow.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X
Connect positive terminal ; of charged
battery C with positive terminal = with a
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal ; of charged battery C first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
battery C and run at idle speed.
X Slide cover A from negative terminal B in
direction of arrow.
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
battery C with negative terminal B with
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
negative terminal ? of charged battery
C first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
You can now turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not switch on the
headlamps under any circumstances.
X
Remove the jumper cables from negative
terminals ? and B first.
X Remove the jumper cables from positive
terminals ; and =.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
X Close cover : of positive terminal =.
X Slide cover A back onto negative terminal
B.
X Have the battery checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Towing the vehicle
Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
be transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 339
Version: 2.11.8.1
Towing the vehicle
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
If circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
may be towed with all wheels on the ground
only so far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be
employed.
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
following instructions:
RDo
not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the
automatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
RDo
not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
RTowing
of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
339
i If the battery is disconnected or
discharged
Rthe
SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
park position P
For more information see “Battery”
(Y page 334) or “Jump starting”
(Y page 336).
Installing towing eye bolt
Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
which are located behind covers on each
bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
compartment underneath the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 268).
X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
Removing cover in front bumper
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
Z
Practical hints
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Towing the vehicle
340
Vehicles with AMG Sport Package
Practical hints
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 340
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicles with Sport Package
X
Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Removing cover in rear bumper
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
is extremely hot.
Vehicles with AMG Sport Package
X
Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow.
X Vehicles with Sport Package: Pry
cover : with a flat, blunt object as a lever.
X Vehicles with AMG Sport Package: Press
mark on cover : as indicated by the arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 341
Version: 2.11.8.1
Towing the vehicle
Fixing towing eye bolt
341
transfer case, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground.
When towing the vehicle with one axle raised,
the wheels on the ground have to move freely.
Therefore follow the respective steps below,
after the front or the rear axle being raised:
Example illustration front bumper
X
Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
equipped, the wheel wrench from the
vehicle tool kit.
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
threaded hole to its stop.
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
clockwise.
or
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt.
Removing towing eye bolt
X
Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Reinstalling cover: Engage cover :
(Y page 339) at top and press at bottom.
X
Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
X
Switch off the automatic central locking
(Y page 135).
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 96).
X Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 111).
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the vehicle
is being towed with one axle raised.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Keep in mind that it is important for the
SmartKey to be left in starter switch with
the ignition switched off. As soon as the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch the automatic transmission will shift
to park position P.
Towing with one axle raised
! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with
one axle raised. Doing so could damage the
Z
Practical hints
Towing with the front axle raised
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 342
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuses
342
Towing with the rear axle raised
X
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 96).
X Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you when leaving the
vehicle.
! Keep in mind that it is important to have
the ignition switched on. Removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch or
opening a front door with the ignition
switched off will automatically shift the
automatic transmission into park position
P.
! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Practical hints
Towing with all wheels on the ground
G Warning!
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with
a tow bar if:
Rthe
engine will not run
Rthere
is a malfunction in the power supply
or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 96).
X
warning flasher in use, use the combination
switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
Only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
is a malfunction in the brake system
Rthere
X
i While being towed with the hazard
Stranded vehicle
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
done with the greatest of care, especially if
the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Note the following when freeing a stranded
vehicle:
RAvoid
pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
RNever
try to free a vehicle that is still
coupled to a trailer.
RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward in
its own previously made tracks.
Fuses
Introduction
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and
systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 343
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuses
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in
question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse box in passenger compartment
! Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
box cover or the dashboard.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in the
dashboard on the front passenger side.
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The fuse chart is located in the cargo
compartment with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 268). The fuse chart explains the fuse
allocation and fuse amperages.
Before replacing fuses
X
Engage the parking brake.
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
X
X
Open the front passenger door.
Opening: Open the glove box.
X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object as a lever
into the edge of fuse box cover : at the
position indicated by the arrow.
X Loosen fuse box cover : from the
dashboard using the lever.
X Using your hands, pull fuse box cover :
out and remove.
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into
holders on the front of the dashboard.
X Press fuse box cover : back on until it
engages.
X
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
Fuse box in engine compartment
X
Open the hood.
Z
Practical hints
G Warning!
343
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 344
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuses
344
X
Opening: Open the cargo compartment.
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
X Closing: Install everything in reverse order.
Emergency engine shutdown
Practical hints
Example illustration fuse box ML 350 (ML 350
BlueTEC, ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar)
X
With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
fuse box cover :.
X Opening: Pull clamps ; in direction of
arrow.
X Lift fuse box cover : up.
X
Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover : down and secure
with clamps ;.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X
Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
If the engine cannot be turned off as
described (Y page 108), you may use the
following emergency procedure.
X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 268).
X Open the fuse box in engine compartment.
X Remove fuse 120.
Find its location in the fuse chart.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 345
Version: 2.11.8.1
345
Vehicle equipment ............................
Parts service .....................................
Warranty coverage ...........................
Identification labels ..........................
Vehicle specification ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (164.125) .....................
Vehicle specification ML 350
(164.156) ...........................................
Vehicle specification ML 350
4MATIC (164.186) .............................
Vehicle specification ML 550
4MATIC (164.172) .............................
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG
(164.177) ...........................................
Rims and tires ...................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......
346
346
346
346
348
348
349
350
351
352
356
Technical data
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
346
Identification labels
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Parts service
Technical data
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 346
Version: 2.11.8.1
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz
Parts required for maintenance and repair
work. In addition, strategically located parts
distribution centers provide quick and
reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
33 Applicable
to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty33
RState
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification labels
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 347
Version: 2.11.8.1
Identification labels
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
be found
347
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door
B-pillar
Ron passenger side underneath the rear seat
(Y page 347)
Ron
the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 347)
Technical data
Passenger-side rear seat
X
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
; Paintwork code
Fold seat cushion ? forward
(Y page 189).
X Fold carpet A forward in direction of
arrow.
VIN B is now visible.
= VIN
C Emission control information label,
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
; Paintwork code
= VIN
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
D Engine number (engraved on engine)
E VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
i When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine number.
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
348
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 348
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle specification ML 350 (164.156)
Vehicle specification ML 350 BlueTEC
4MATIC (164.125)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Engine ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Engine, type
Mode of operation
Technical data
No. of cylinders
642
Diesel 4-stroke
engine
6
Bore
3.27 in (83.00 mm)
Stroke
3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston
displacement
182.3 cu in
(2 987 cm3)
Compression
ratio
16.5:1
Output acc. to
SAE J 1349
210 hp/3 400 rpm
(157 kW/3 400 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
400 lb-ft/
1 600 - 2 400 rpm
(543 Nm/
1 600 - 2 400 rpm)
Maximum engine
speed
4 500 rpm
Firing order
1-4-2-5-3-6
Poly-V-belt
2 035 mm
Electrical system
ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Alternator
14 V/220 A
Starter motor
12 V/2.0 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
34 Exterior
Main dimensions
ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Overall vehicle
length
188.5 in (4 788 mm)
Overall vehicle
width34
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
71.5 in (1 815 mm)35
Wheelbase
114.8 in (2 915 mm)
Track, front
63.7 in (1 619 mm)
Track, rear
63.8 in (1 621 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)35
7.3 - 10.3 in
(186 - 261 mm)36
Turning circle
39.0 ft (11.6 m)
Weights ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Roof load
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Vehicle specification ML 350
(164.156)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Engine ΜL 350
Engine, type
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
rear view mirrors folded out.
with steel suspension.
36 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program).
35 Vehicles
69.8 - 73.0 in
(1 774 - 1 854 mm)36
272
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
6
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 349
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle specification ML 350 4MATIC (164.186) 349
Bore
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston
displacement
213.5 cu in
(3 498 cm3)
Compression
ratio
10.7:1
Output acc. to
SAE J 134937
268 hp/6 000 rpm
(200 kW/6 000 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
258 lb-ft/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum engine
speed
6 500 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt
2 398 mm
Overall vehicle
length
188.5 in (4 788 mm)
Overall vehicle
width38
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
71.5 in (1 815 mm)
Wheelbase
114.8 in (2 915 mm)
Track, front
64.0 in (1 627 mm)
Track, rear
64.1 in (1 629 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)
Turning circle
39.0 ft (11.6 m)
Weights ΜL 350
Electrical system ML 350
Roof load
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Vehicle specification ML 350 4MATIC
(164.186)
Alternator
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.4 kW
Battery
12 V/70 Ah
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Spark plugs, type
Bosch Y 7 MPP33
Engine ΜL 350 4MATIC
Spark plugs,
electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Spark plugs,
tightening torque
15 - 18 lb-ft
(20 - 25 Nm)
Engine, type
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
272
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
6
Bore
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston
displacement
213.5 cu in
(3 498 cm3)
37 Premium
38 Exterior
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
rear view mirrors folded out.
Z
Technical data
Main dimensions ΜL 350
Engine ΜL 350
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
350
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 350
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle specification ML 550 4MATIC (164.172)
Technical data
Engine ΜL 350 4MATIC
Compression
ratio
10.7:1
Output acc. to
SAE J 134939
268 hp/6 000 rpm
(200 kW/6 000 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
258 lb-ft/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum engine
speed
6 500 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt
2 398 mm
Electrical system ML 350 4MATIC
Alternator
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.4 kW
Battery
12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs, type
Bosch Y 7 MPP33
Spark plugs,
electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Spark plugs,
tightening torque
Main dimensions ΜL 350 4MATIC
Wheelbase
114.8 in (2 915 mm)
Track, front
64.0 in (1 627 mm)
Track, rear
64.1 in (1 629 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)41
7.3 - 10.3 in
(186 - 261 mm)42
Turning circle
Weights ΜL 350 4MATIC
Roof load
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Engine ML 550 4MATIC
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
Main dimensions ΜL 350 4MATIC
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Vehicle specification ML 550 4MATIC
(164.172)
Engine, type
15 - 18 lb-ft
(20 - 25 Nm)
39.0 ft (11.6 m)
273
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
8
Bore
3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Stroke
3.56 in (90.50 mm)
Overall vehicle
length
188.5 in (4 788 mm)
Overall vehicle
width40
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Total piston
displacement
333.2 cu in
(5 461 cm3)
Overall vehicle
height
71.5 in (1 815 mm)41
Compression
ratio
10.7:1
39 Premium
69.8 - 73.0 in
(1 774 - 1 854 mm)42
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
rear view mirrors folded out.
41 Vehicles with steel suspension.
42 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program).
40 Exterior
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 351
Version: 2.11.8.1
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG (164.177) 351
Output acc. to
SAE J 134943
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
Maximum engine
speed
382 hp/6 000 rpm
(285 kW/6 000 rpm)
391 lb-ft/
2 800 - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm/
2 800 - 4 800 rpm)
6 500 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2 398 mm
Electrical system ML 550 4MATIC
Alternator
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.4 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs, type
Spark plugs,
electrode gap
Spark plugs,
tightening torque
NGK PLKR 7A
Track, front
63.7 in (1 619 mm)
Track, rear
63.8 in (1 621 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)45
7.3 - 10.3 in
(186 - 261 mm)46
Turning circle
15 - 18 lb-ft
(20 - 25 Nm)
Overall vehicle
length
188.5 in (4 788 mm)
Overall vehicle
width44
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
71.5 in (1 815 mm)45
69.8 - 73.0 in
(1 774 - 1 854 mm)46
114.8 in (2 915 mm)
39.0 ft (11.6 m)
Weights ΜL 550 4MATIC
Roof load
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG
(164.177)
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Main dimensions ΜL 550 4MATIC
Wheelbase
Main dimensions ΜL 550 4MATIC
Engine ML 63 AMG
Engine, type
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
156
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
8
Bore
4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke
3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston
displacement
378.8 cu in
(6 208 cm3)
Compression
ratio
11.3:1
Output acc. to
SAE J 134947
503 hp/6 800 rpm
(375 kW/6 800 rpm)
43 Premium
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
rear view mirrors folded out.
45 Vehicles with steel suspension.
46 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program).
47 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
44 Exterior
Z
Technical data
Engine ML 550 4MATIC
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
352
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 352
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rims and tires
Engine ML 63 AMG
Maximum torque 465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (630 Nm/5 200 rpm)
Maximum engine
speed
7 200 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2 360 mm
Technical data
Electrical system ML 63 AMG
Alternator
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/2.1 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs, type
NGK ILZKAR 7A10
Spark plugs,
electrode gap
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Spark plugs,
tightening torque
15 - 18 lb-ft
(20 - 25 Nm)
Main dimensions ML 63 AMG
Overall vehicle
length
189.7 in (4 818 mm)
Overall vehicle
width48
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Overall vehicle
height
69.5 - 72.6 in
(1 765 - 1 845 mm)49
Wheelbase
114.8 in (2 915 mm)
Track, front
65.5 in (1 664 mm)
Track, rear
65.6 in (1 667 mm)
Ground clearance 7.0 - 10.1 in
(177 - 257 mm)49
Turning circle
48 Exterior
39.0 ft (11.6 m)
rear view mirrors folded out.
on the set vehicle level.
49 Depending
Weights ML 63 AMG
Roof load
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Rims and tires
Notes
! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tires
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat
characteristics) original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 330).
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have
run-flat characteristics, you should also
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT kits are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 353
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rims and tires
Rpoor
handling characteristics
Rincreased
noise
Rincreased
fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tire
deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
tires or the vehicle may be the result.
353
equipment, but can be purchased from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may
require the purchase of rims of the
recommended size for use with these
winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
and the standard or optional factoryequipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
your vehicle. For more information contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Further information on tires and rims is
Technical data
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire
inflation pressures for cold tires is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 219).
i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
be equipped
Rwith
wheels of identical dimensions on
each axle (left and right)
Rwith
tires of identical characteristics all
around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,
all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.
i The following pages also list the approved
rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
with winter tires. Winter tires are not
available as standard or optional factory
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
354
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 354
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model
Technical data
18" wheels Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
8 J x 18 H2
2.36 in (60 mm)
Winter tires50,51,52
255/55 R18 105H M+Si
All-terrain tires50,51,52
255/55 R18 105H M+S
Model
ML 350
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC53
19" wheels Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
8 J x 19 H2
2.36 in (60 mm)
All-season tires50
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires50,51
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
Model
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC53
19" wheels Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
50 Radial-ply
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350 4MATIC (Sport Package)
ML 550 4MATIC
8 J x 19 H2
2.36 in (60 mm)
All-season tires50
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
MOExtended54
Winter tires50,51
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
MOExtended54
tires.
available as factory equipment.
52 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC: Standard tire without run-flat characteristics. Equipping the vehicle with TIREFIT
is strongly recommended.
53 ML 350 BlueTEC: Availabilty in Canada depending on vehicle production date.
54 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or tire pressure
loss warning system (Canada vehicles) only.
51 Not
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 355
Version: 2.11.8.1
Rims and tires
ML 550 4MATIC (Sport Package)
AMG rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
8.5 J x 19 H2
2.28 in (58 mm)
All-season tires55
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires55,56
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
Model
ML 63 AMG
19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
9.5 J x 19 H2
1.81 in (46 mm)
Winter tires55,56
285/45 R19 107H M+Si
Model
ML 350 (Appearance Package)
ML 350 4MATIC (Appearance Package)
20" wheels Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
8.5 J x 20 H2
2.17 in (55 mm)
All-season tires55
265/45 R20 108H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Model
ML 550 4MATIC (Sport Package)
20" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
8.5 J x 20 H2
2.36 in (60 mm)
All-season tires55,57
265/45 R20 108H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Model
ML 63 AMG
20" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
10 J x 20 H2
1.81 in (46 mm)
Summer tires55,57
295/40 ZR20 106Y
Model
ML 63 AMG
21" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
Summer tires55,57
Technical data
19"wheels
Model
355
10 J x 21 H2
1.81 in (46 mm)
295/35 ZR21 107Y XL (Extra Load)
55 Radial-ply
tires.
available as factory equipment.
57 Must not be used with snow chains.
56 Not
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
356
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 356
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Technical data
i The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have a spare wheel.
Model
ML 350 (all models)
ML 550 (all models)
ML 63 AMG
Rim
4.0 B x 18 H2
5.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.58 in (40 mm)
0.51 in (13 mm)
Minispare tire58
T 155/90 D18 113M
or
T 155/90 R18 113M
—
Collapsible tire58
—
185/85-19 104P
Recommended tire
inflation pressure
61 psi (4.2 bar)
51 psi (3.5 bar)
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by MercedesBenz.
For information on tested and approved
products, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
58 Must
not be used with snow chains.
fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct contact
with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 357
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil
filter
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
ML 550 4MATIC
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
ML 63
Automatic
transmission
Front axle
Rear axle
Capacity
AMG59
Fuels, coolants,
lubricants, etc.
Approved engine
oils
10.3 US qt (9.7 l)
All models,
except ML 63 AMG
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
ML 63 AMG60
9.7 US qt (9.2 l)
MB Automatic
Transmission Fluid
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
Hypoid gear oil
ML 63 AMG
Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
Hypoid gear oil
ML 350
1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
ML 63 AMG
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Technical data
Model
Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Transfer case
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 0.53 US qt (0.5 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 63 AMG
MB Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Power steering
ML 350
MB Power Steering
Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
approx.
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC approx.
1.05 US qt (1.0 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 63 AMG
59 Engine
357
MB Power Steering
Fluid
approx.
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
with oil cooler.
transmission with oil cooler.
60 Automatic
Z
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Technical data
358
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 358
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants,
lubricants, etc.
Brake system
All models
0.63 US qt (0.6 l)
MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC approx.
10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350
MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
ML 550 4MATIC
approx.
12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
ML 63 AMG
approx.
12.2 US qt (11.5 l)
Fuel tank
All models
25.1 US gal (95.0 l)
Fuel tank
reserve
All models,
except ML 63 AMG
approx.
3.4 US gal (13.0 l)
ML 63 AMG
approx.
4.0 US gal (15.0 l)
Gasoline engine:
Premium unleaded
gasoline (Minimum
Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of
96 RON/86 MON])
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY
DIESEL FUEL
(ULSD, 15 ppm
SULFUR MAXIMUM)
AdBlue® tank
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 7.0 US gal (26.6 l)
AdBlue® complying
with ISO 22241
Air
conditioning
system
All models
—
R134a refrigerant
and special
PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system
and headlamp
cleaning
system
All models
7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
MB Windshield
Washer
Concentrate61
(Y page 364)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 364)
61 Mixed
with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 359
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
359
Viscosity grades for engine oils
Approved engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our
service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
according to the lowest air temperature
expected before the next oil change.
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Model
Engine,
type
MB sheet
number
ML 350 BlueTEC
4MATIC
642
229.51
ML 350 4MATIC
272
229.5
ML 350
272
229.3/
229.5
ML 550 4MATIC
273
229.5
ML 63 AMG
156
229.562
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
outside of oil containers.
62 Restriction:
Engine oil additives
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
system.
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
G Warning!
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating
conditions, this moisture content can lead to
Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Z
Technical data
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
360
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 360
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus
reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance
Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will provide you with additional
information.
light load such as two persons and no
luggage.
not exceed 2/3 of maximum
accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
RDo
Fuel requirements
Gasoline engine
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
engine)
G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
! To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
If premium unleaded gasoline is not
available and low octane gasoline is used,
follow these precautions:
RHave
the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
RAvoid
full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
RDo
not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Diesel engine
Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
(ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that
meets the ASTM D975 standard. Failure to
use ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
FUEL (ULSD) can severely damage the
vehicle’s exhaust after-treatment device.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 361
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For further information on diesel fuel pump
labeling, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Biodiesel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester) containing fuels
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of B5
(standard ULSD which may contain a
maximum of 5% biodiesel) in all Common-rail
injection (CDI) and BlueTEC diesel engines.
Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of
biodiesel, e.g. B20, as well as straight
biodiesel may cause severe damage to your
engine/fuel system and are not approved.
Please ask your service station personnel for
further information. If the B5 biodiesel blend
is not sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate
that it meets the ULSD standard, please do
not use it.
The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
not cover damages caused by the use of fuels
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel
standards.
RKnocking/pinging
RMisfire
RPower
loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasoline which contains these additives, the
use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is
recommended.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
listing of approved products. Follow
directions on the product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and may
be harmful to the engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional
fuel additives other than those tested and
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
vehicles are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
or Extended Limited Warranties.
AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits can
build up, especially on the intake valves and
in the combustion area, leading to engine
performance problems such as:
RWarm-up
hesitation
RUnstable
idle
361
ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
High ambient temperatures
If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above
122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for
example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas
Z
Technical data
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
362
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
vapors may escape when opening the
AdBlue® tank.
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes.
Low ambient temperatures
Technical data
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 362
Version: 2.11.8.1
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of
approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating
system. The vehicle can thus be operated at
temperatures below 12‡ (-11†).
Special additives
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Purity
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g.
during repair work, the same liquid must not
be used to refill the tank as its purity is no
longer guaranteed.
! Impurities caused for example by other
service products, cleaning agents, and dust
result in increased emissions,
malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine
damage.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
RCorrosion
RFreeze
protection
protection
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only.
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze separately from each other,
could cause engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
approximately 266‡ (130†).
The coolant solution must be used year round
to provide the necessary corrosion protection
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
of equal specification are used to renew the
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
the proper level.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 363
Version: 2.11.8.1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this amount
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Model
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
parts. The use of aluminum components in
motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked.
The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†)
Cooling system
363
-49‡ (-45†)
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 5.0 US qt (4.75 l)
ML 350
ML 350 4MATIC
5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
ML 550 4MATIC
6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
ML 63 AMG
6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
Z
Technical data
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
364
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Technical data
X
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 364
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine MercedesBenz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time September 11, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 365
Version: 2.11.8.1
164_AKB; 7; 31, en-US
d2ureepe,
2009-09-11T12:07:36+02:00 - Seite 366
Version: 2.11.8.1
É1645841383}ËÍ
1645841383
Order no. 6515 4317 13 Part no. 164 584 13 83 Edition B 2010